Home

Analog Input/Output Module User's Manual

Contents

1. 3 Common area Un G1200 to Un G1799 Table 6 3 Common area Un G1200 to Un G1799 z ag Data f w Item Address decimal 4 Description Default Read write 2 G type 1200 to System area 1599 5 1600 Level data 0 0 RIW 3 1601 Level data 1 0 RWS 5 oO 1602 Level data 2 0 RIW 3 2 m N 3 1603 Level data 3 0 R W AS 1604 p Level data 4 0 R w 3 r 1605 Level data 5 0 RIW 3 1606 Level data 6 0 RiW 3 A 1607 Level data 7 0 Riw 3 7 E 1608 Level data 8 0 RIw s 3 1609 Level data 9 0 RIW 3 i 1610 i ap to System area 1699 1700 CH1 Digital output value 0 R 1701 VH CH2 Digital output value 0 R 1702 CH3 Digital output value 0 R 1703 CH4 Digital output value 0 R 5 1704 5 to System area 5 1709 1710 CH1 Scaling value 0 R 1711 WH CH2 Scaling value 0 R ii pales 1712 CH3 Scaling value 0 R 55 area La 1713 CH4 Scaling value 0 R no 2 i 1714 T to System area 96 Mw 1719 O 1720 CH1 Maximum digital output value 0 R 6 1721 CH1 Minimum digital output value 0 R 1722 CH2 Maximum digital output value 0 R gt 1723 WH CH2 Minimum digital output value 0 R is 1724 CH3 Maximum digital output value 0 R a 1725 CH3 Minimum digital output value 0 R a 1726 CH4 Maximum digital output value 0 R tb 1727 CH4 Minimum digital outp
2. lu 8 6 1 Monitor Test window Wu gt O Purpose Start monitoring testing the buffer memory and I O signals and Operating condition setting from this window 5 H Operating procedure z0 E z Select monitor test module dialog box gt Input Start I O No gt Select Module 25 nO type gt Select Module model name gt Click the Monitor Test button 4 Input a start I O number in hexadecimal 2 The window can also be displayed from the System Monitor dialog box of GX 2 i q Developer Version 6 or later g For details refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual o Q N Setting window Monitor Test Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 A Module model name Q644D2DA 0 z Setting item Current value Setting value 2 CH3 Setting range 5 CH4 Setting range Ww Maximum value minimum value information Maximum value minimum value information g CH1 Operating condition setting CHI Operating condition setting Click these buttons to display CH2 Operating condition setting CH2 Operating condition setting z CH3 Operating condition setting CH3 Operating condition setting following windows CH4 Operating condition setting CH4 Operating condition setting EAr oe CHE Digital input value 5 CHS Se
3. applications Table 8 6 Control keys that can be used Key Application Esc Cancels a newly input value in a cell or exits the screen Tab Moves among controls in the screen oa Used with the mouse to select multiple cells for test Ctrl anM operation Execute test Deletes a character at the cursor position Delete When a cell is selected this key deletes all the data in the cell Back Deletes a character at the cursor position Space T Moves the cursor Bi Moves the cursor up one page Page Moves the cursor down one page Down Saves a value input in a cell 2 Data created with the utility package The following data and files to be created with the utility package are also be used for GX Developer Figure 8 4 shows which data and files are used in which operation a Intelligent function module paramete This parameter is created by the auto refresh setting and stored in an intelligent function module parameter file in a project created with GX Developer Project Program m Parameter m PLC parameter m Network parameter Intelligent function module parameter Figure 8 3 Project hierarchy 8 7 8 3 Operating the Utility Package 8 3 1 Common operations UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA M eL 26 Ll crie
4. Pet Fa Hest stn ot cam l alal alel p y ath 1 4 gaz l laL dllm BIE llle A ADA FE EDI D I_START OLEND E Figure 8 12 FB pasting procedure 8 25 8 8 Usage of FB 8 8 2 Pasting an FB to a sequence program UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEC Fl cries 8 8 3 Converting compiling a sequence program Purpose u Convert compile a sequence program to which an FB was pasted so that the i program can be executed 9 jf MELSOFT series GX Developer C MELSEC Gppw FB LD Edit mode MAIN 138 Step Project Edt Find Replace Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help wel A l elel alel Halala Pese e AmS 3 z lel z alz el ial l 25 Blekk sekka oe Berne A ADA FB FB1 5 Zz ais ep Zz fe q O m O W Q N Figure 8 13 Conversion compilation 6 Operating procedure S Select Convert gt Convert Compile of GX Developer re 8 3 Z l 65 Yi Se amp O W az Lu mE uw a Q Z amp Or ES vao Roe HOE Ww aaw e e x 9 la t S 5 f g E Q x W Qs T Ed TE ET SEE S 3x E g e
5. ae 2 qe o gt co 2 B D n O gt Cc U g koj c ES is gt lt 4 External power supply 77 connector External power supply 4cm a connection cable lt Ferritic core Externally connected power supply FG 24VDC Figure 7 4 Installing a ferrite core to an external power supply connection cable 7 4 Wiring 7 4 1 Wiring precautions PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEG Q series 7 4 2 External wiring w A W gt 2 O a Signal source 0 to 10V 15V 500kQ V I z O i z 5 500kQ a GND 15V a 3 Analog input 52 CH1 to CH4 3 5 aS Signal source 0 to 20mA 15V 500kQ V a I n 250 Z JE v 5 m 500kQ T We 15V O GND 4 iL 4 9 Modules such as a motor Voltage output oa drive module n 15V 1kQ A D A V conversion COM 1m 15v 4 L Analog output Modules such as a motor Current output drive module CH5 CH6 15V 5 oQ Z lt A COM 600Q gt asv No 7 r O 15V T6 24VDC ao cr 24V 65 AG DC DC Onn iter FG converter v Q 6 L 15V ae amp 0 Figure 7 5 External wiring example Fy 1 Use shielded twisted pair cables m 2 The input resistance of the Q64AD2DA i
6. d Set CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO or CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 to Enable 0 and turn off and then on Operating condition setting request Y9 1 A D conversion CH1 to CH4 Monitor CH1 Digital output value Un G100 to check if A D conversion is properly performed 2 D A conversion CH5 and CH6 Set CH5 Digital input value Un G802 and turn off and then on CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 to check if D A conversion is properly performed Be careful since analog values will be output e Since the new module is in default status it must be initialized by a sequence program after control restart Before initialization check if the contents of the initialization program is correct 1 Normal system configuration The sequence program should perform initialization on the leading edge of Module ready X0 of the Q64AD2DA When control resumption is executed Module ready X0 turns on and initialization is performed If the sequence program performs initialization only for one scan after RUN initialization is not performed B System using a remote I O network Create a user device that performs initialization at any timing Initial setting request signal in the sequence program After control restart turn on Initial setting request signal to perform initialization If the sequence program is created so that initialization may be performed only for one scan a
7. ELSECTE ories Q64AD2DA 1 gt RUN ALM lt 3 2 gt ERR cHt 4 ND seall cL Al View A ae fol sd LESSIG Module front surface side i c 4 s ANET AEE 2 S KG a V fst e 7 Cc 6 rt g L 3 ei N LH 9 L gt ket Jm N T BAM EAK i2 ial ae con P Base unit side H 14 C 5 It a empan p 16 4 Coul Ti th real AID DIA _ 10 10V 0 20mA 4 gt I View A Figure 7 2 Module appearance 7 3 Part Names PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING M aL 26 fel ceries 1 Part names The following table shows the part names Table 7 2 Part names fe wi Number Name Description G Indicates the operating status of the Q64AD2DA On Normal operation 1 RUN LED i A Off 5V power supply is shut off watchdog timer error 2 occurred or online module change is enabled 2 Indicates the error and status of the Q64AD2DA E gt On Error ripe pZ 2 ERR LED Flashing Switch setting SOT l l l A 8 Other than OH is set to the switch 5 of the intelligent function module Off Normal operation Indicates the warning status of the Q64AD2DA amp 3 ALM LED Flashing Input signal error 2 Off Normal operation S U 4 Serial number plate Indicates the serial number of the Q64AD2DA 9 5 External power supply Terminal connector that connects 2
8. 2 3 Checking Function Version Serial Number and Software Version This section describes how to check the function version of the Q64AD2DA and the software version of GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA ed OVERVIEW 1 Checking the function version and serial number of the Q64AD2DA The serial number and function version of the Q64AD2DA are described in the rating plate on the front part of the module or displayed in the System monitor dialog box of GX Developer z O amp w 5 o LL Z Q Ss W 5 2 gt N a Checking on the rating plate on the side of the Q64AD2DA i MELSEC Q 6 O MITSUBISHI O i MODEL Q Q N Function version SERIAL 11031 00000000000 i i Relevant regulation ce ese ee eee mcm 4 standards a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN L fej Figure 2 2 Rating plate on the side of module 5 Z b Checking on the front of the module ra The serial number and function version on the rating plate is shown on the front at the bottom of the module as ARPA am 906 ERR iy Ha 2 pa g e te Ea 2 4 y m w pa fr __ mE oan L 5 ag E A a r 10 10V SY L_ raai oczmall VEO hae f110310000000000 lt Function version 9 Eu ___ lt lt AD DIA XS Or 10 t0v N E 0 20mal My YA 42 HI rae j Serial No EO
9. x x x x x x Y Remove the target module v 3 Mounting a new module Mount a new module 4 X Y refresh resumes and x module starts operation RUN LED is on Module operates with After mounting the module default settings click the Execution button on JCS XO remains off O x x x O x the dialog box of GX Developer AENA If initial setting parameters have been set module operates according to them at this point Operation check before start of control 4 Checking eel Click the Cancel button to leave the online module change mode Conduct an operation test on the oO x x oO x oO new module by using the Device test dialog box of GX Developer or the Monitor Test screen of GX Configurator Ca y Module operates according to test operation 2 Completion of operation check 5 Restarting control J Resume the online module change Module operates according to Oo oO fo o x o mode using GX Developer and gt sequence program which click the Execution button to restart performs initial setting on the control l rising edge of XO 2 l y Module ready X0 turns on 1 Access to the intelligent function module device UD GO is included 2 In the case of absence of the operation marked 2 the intelligent function module performs the operation prior to the marked operation 1 0 3 10 2 Operations
10. FE C 1 ue jndjno Boyeue jeonoeiq 2 O 5 c Oo ae e a D S 5 Ke E O E XI gt L eee O calle a O o ge lt Eo D8 x E m 5 3 re 2 oO oG 2 EE E E EN ANE eee pet eet eae ot la SO Oo D fob DE co e cco oc tece sooo leeecla o 2g oS E EE 2 c jE 2S S 5 lt a o 2 62 SG b lL 4 4 S a a do e c wees E 3 S RA o S s T nO x 5 g 2 c 3 S 8 2 i phar 3 2 3 Ea Q 2 5 5 x N 2 g N Oo 33 o E 5 oe 5 amp e 2 2 A Beyoa yndjno Bojeuy O o Oo A Ta s aiat a S Oo 2 5 E Q o Q S oo o e dD v Oo o a x 2 D ebues jndyno Bojeue jeopeld bue yndyno ojeue jeonoeg E y Oe S 1 3 gt v g T Pa vt Oo gt Se eA ee A ES p oh pa gt ie 5 n O o S 5 NS g 2 o N 3 2 5 5 D oO GS E E E E E E FE 8 d a cam pees fee ic Sor a 8 S TE 9 o E m pac F 3 S ogge op preg AAT d aaaea a ES siepe eta tN on se TOT e Se a te D E c J Zo Ng g 88 Zegzt2 5 ES ot os mm ONY SL So gt gt D 2E 5 z O iL gt E oe EEE ab oe SEES So a So ee eee ee T oO N o C ce eee a Sa s A See See oR Se ee ee g O 7 i i O Ko e e ea eco a e a a e ee a e a ZA E ESEE AE NEE B 2 3 2 2 e B A 26e J0A yndyno Boyeuy i A 26e 0A yndjno Boyeuy T oO 3 2 2 I O conversion characteristic of D A conversion 3 SPECIFICATIONS 1 4 to 20mA 2 Current output characteristic
11. FUNCTION c The default of shifting amount to conversion value is 0 W d Ifa value is written to a shifting amount to conversion value regardless of whether 5 iL Operating condition setting request Y9 is set to on or off the shifting amount to ag g conversion value will be added every sampling period E 2 Duy Se O W a Lu mE uw a a A Zo fo Lu Or 42 vao RoE GOE X wW aan UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 9 4 2 4 Shifting function A D conversion 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 3 Setting example For the channel in setting the input range to 0 to 5V and the high resolution mode to O to 12000 I O characteristic is adjusted as shown below 1 CH1 Digital output value 12000 s2escsessssteuereeeeces Un G100 2 Scaling value f T1990 ame a ST a After adjustment CH1 Shifting amount to t na u 1 Digital output value i Before adjustment 2 CH1 Scaling value i Un G102 0 7 i Input voltage V 5 10 7 CH1 Scaling value Un G100 Un G102 Figure 4 2 I O characteristic and scaling value after shifting processing For the case of above example set CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value Un G13 to 10 E POINT If the scaling value exceeds the range from 32768 to 32767 after a shifting processing the value of lower 32768 and upper 3
12. 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW 7 8 9 MELSEC IA series Logging facility The A D converted digital output values can be stored into buffer memory Logging data can be stored up to 10000th data point storage area for a channel The logging facility logs data every sampling periods in the shortest period In addition the logging facility logs large volumes of data at high speeds resulting in improving efficiency of debugging Online module change Modules can be changed without the system being stopped Easy setting using GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA The number of sequence programs can be reduced since GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA sold separately allows the Q64AD2DA settings on the dialog box Also GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA simplifies checking of the module settings and operation status In addition FB 2 can be automatically created from intelligent function module parameters set in advance to use them in a sequence program 1 Either GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA checks the intelligent function module parameter setting and the setting status or operation status of the Q64AD2DA In addition the setting and status can be checked by installing both GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA 2 FB is the function for making a circuit block used in a sequence program repeatedly a part FB to use it in the sequence program This function can improve the efficien
13. A value other than the range from 2 to 60 times is set to CH1 Reset the averaging count setting to within 2 to A Section 6 4 Averaging process time number 60 times of times setting Un G2 A value other than 0 1 2 3 or 4 is Reset 0 1 2 3 or 4 for the input signal error set to CH1 Input signal error Section 6 8 detection setting detection setting Un G20 A value other than the range from 0 to 250 is set to CH1 Input signal Reset the input signal error detection setting Secton66 cti error detection setting value value to within 0 to 250 Un G21 CH1 Input signal error detection i Disconnection detection function used setting Un G20 is set to detect ae Set the input range to within 4 to 20mA disconnection 4 for the channels Section 6 8 aie Extended mode or 1 to 5V Extended mode where the following input ranges i Section Disconnection detection function unused are not set f 7 5 2 Set the input signal error detection setting to 0 4 to 20mA Extended mode LA et 2 or 3 1 to 5V Extended mode CH1 Logging enable disable f Reset the logging enable disable setting to 0 or Section setting Un G30 set to the value 4 6 10 other than 1 or 2 f i Either or both of the values for the following is or set outside the Reset both or either of the logging cycle setting setting ranges value and logging cycle unit setting to within the CH1 Loggin
14. 2 How to clear storage data To clear the storage data of all the channels CH1 to CH4 perform the following settings 1 Set the analog input value within the setting range 2 Set Error clear request YF or Operating condition setting request Y9 to on 6 25 6 23 CH1 Input Signal Error Detection Flag Un G114 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC IA series 6 24 CH1 Oldest Pointer Un G120 In the logging data storage area an address of buffer memory storing the oldest data can gt be checked Refer to Section 4 2 7 4 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Stored data z The difference between the numeric value of the address storing the oldest data and E the numeric value of the start address in the logging data storage area is stored ae zE Storage example When the value to be stored into CH2 Oldest pointer Un G320 is 58 8551 CH2 Logging data storage area 2 Un G15000 2 q o L D Latest data gt Un G23550 D 23551 15000 8551 Un G24999 Zz Figure 6 8 Status of CH2 Logging data storage area Un G15000 to Un G24999 2 O Z POINT 2 1 The value of the oldest pointer is fixed to 0 because the oldest data is stored into the beginning of the logging data storage area while logging data from the pul start area to 10000th area a a N 2 After the 10000th area CH1 Oldest pointer Un G120 moves to the next
15. 596 8 8 Usage of FB 8 26 8 8 3 Converting compiling a sequence program Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres CHAPTERQ9 PROGRAMMING This chapter explains programs of the Q64AD2DA When applying the programs introduced in this chapter to an actual system fully verify that the system control has no problems Create a program in which A D conversion or D A conversion is performed with following the procedures shown in Figure 9 1 The initial setting can be configured with both the utility package and sequence program Using the utility package allows omitting an initial setting program and therefore the scan time will be shorten The program examples in this chapter explain the initial setting auto refresh setting and monitor test operations with GX Configurator AD The same applies to GX Configurator DA Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG Aeres 9 1 Programming Procedures Create a program in which A D conversion or D A conversion is performed with following the procedures shown below PROGRAMMING Start programming e ee Sosa 1 Initial setting program W 1 h 2 Set up the initial setting with a sequence program a i NO i 2 3 Use the utility package Refer to CHAPTER 6 and Section 9 2 3 m i Initial setting for Bz AID conversion ss YES i A D conversion enable disable program co i Averaging processing setting program i Scaling fu
16. aa PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 6 38 Level Data Un G1600 to Un G1609 6 36 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 39 Latest Address of Error History Un G1800 A buffer memory address storing the latest error history is shown 1 Stored data Table 6 29 Storage data of Latest address of error history Un G1800 Stored value Latest error history 0 No errors Error history 1 1810 Un G1810 to Un G1814 Error history 2 1820 Un G1820 to Un G1824 Error history 16 1960 Un G1960 to Un G1964 6 40 Error History Un G1810 to Un G1964 Up to 16 error logs that occurred in the Q64AD2DA are registered Refer to Section 11 1 An error history is registered to 10 words of buffer memory area as shown in Table 6 30 Table 6 30 Error history Un G1810 to Un G1964 Storage area Description Un G1810 Error code Error history 1 Un G1811 to Un G1814 Error time to Un G1820 Error code Error history 2 Un G1821 to Un G1824 Error time to Un G1960 Error code Error history 16 Un G1961 to Un G1964 Error time If a new error occurs the error history will be stored into the area located after the area storing the latest error history and the latest address of error history will be updated If 16 or more errors occurred in the past a new error will be written over the oldest error history area E POINT
17. gt WwW Kw mov D7 Do y mo o j mo m Do So De Koo heey DG 0o D0 K BOD D20 Kai J Cot putting error codes with BCD Turns on Error clear request YF f a RST YOF q Turns off Error clear request YF Figure 9 14 Program example using GX Configurator AD 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 14 9 2 2 Program example using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 9 2 3 Program example without using the utility package 1 Device list Table 9 7 Device list Device Function D21 CH1 Scaling read value D22 CH2 Scaling read value D23 CH3 Scaling read value D31 CH5 Initial digital input value D32 CH6 Initial digital input value Zo Device used for obtaining the latest address of error history X0 Module ready X7 Input signal error detection signal x9 Operating condition setting completion flag XF Error flag Q64AD2DA X YO to X YF Y5 CH5 Output enable disable flag Y6 CH6 Output enable disable flag Y9 Operating condition setting request YF Error clear request X10 Device turned on by user to start reading a scaling value X11 Device turned on by user to set initial digital input value X12 Device turned on by user to write digital input value QX10 X10 to X1F x13 Device turned on by user to enable analog outputs of all channels X14 Device turned on by user to reset input signal error detection X15 Device turned on
18. Enterprise Operating System English version 1 Install GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA of the same language with GX Developer Version 4 or later that has been installed The following combinations are inapplicable GX Configurator AD GX Developer Japanese version and GX Configurator AD English version GX Developer English version and GX Configurator AD Japanese version The same applies to GX Configurator DA 2 GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA cannot be used as an add in software for GX Developer Version 3 or earlier 3 At least 15GB free space is required for Windows Vista 4 Resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels or more is recommended for Windows Vista 8 5 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 8 2 2 Operating environment UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA NELSECIA series Table 8 5 Operating system and performance required for personal computer F Performance required for personal computer Operating system m CPU W Windows 95 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more Windows 98 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more Windows Me Pentium 150MHz or more 32MB or more Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more 6 Windows 2000 Professional Pentium 133MHz or more 64MB or more a Windows XP Professional Service Pack1 or higher Pentium 300MHz or more 128MB or more i g 2 Windo
19. Figure 3 5 shows current output characteristics Analog output current mA g 4 Normal resolutio mode mode Le Vt it a it 11 High resolution it 11 Ii li tt it Ii Ii LEE LHe it 3 11 fd ZN Z N 288 96 0 40004095 12000 12287 Digital input value Figure 3 5 Current output characteristic Practical analog output range 2 0 to 20mA MELSEC TA eries Analog output current mA TT fot E pt 11 mode tt Lp tt Practical analog output range High resolution mode _ ra 7 Z 288 96 0 40004095 12000 12287 Digital input value 4 POINT Set each output range within the practical digital input range and analog output range If these ranges are exceeded the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the performance specifications Avoid using the dotted line area shown in Figure 3 5 3 2 I O Conversion Characteristic 3 2 2 I O conversion characteristic of D A conversion 4 FUNCTION CHAPTER4 FUNCTION 4 1 A D conversion function AG el series The device numbers X or Y and buffer memory addresses described in this chapter are used for CH1 The device numbers and buffer memory addresses specified in D A conversion are used for CH5 For the device numbers and buffer memory addresses used for other channels refer to Section 5 1 and Section 6 1 Function List Table 4 1 lists the functions of
20. GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSECK 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package For how to install or uninstall the utility package refer to Method of installing the MELSOFT Series included in the utility package OVERVIEW 8 2 1 Precautions for use This section provides precautions for using GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 1 Using either of the utilities can check the parameter settings of intelligent function module setting status and operating status of A D and D A conversions They can also be checked when both GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA have been installed 1 For safety use Read Safety Precautions and the basic operations described in the GX Developer Operating Manual since GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA are add in software for GX Developer SPECIFICATIONS 2 Installation GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA are add in software for GX Developer Version 4 or later Therefore install GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA on the personal computer on which GX Developer Version 4 or later has been installed FUNCTION 3 Display error when using Intelligent function module utility Due to insufficient system resource the screen may not be normally displayed while Intelligent function module utility is used In this case exit Intelligent function module utility GX Developer such as a program and co
21. Stop monitor Figure 10 9 Monitor Test window 5 Restarting control y W Q 2 a After redisplaying the Online module change dialog box by selecting Diagnostics gt Online module change of GX Developer click the button to restart controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the module Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address oooH ant Module name 064AD2DA Installation confirmation Status Module control restart i g i Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Cancel Figure 10 10 Online module change restart of module control dialog box 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 1 0 8 10 3 1 When the initial setting has been configured with GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEG TA eres b Dialog box informing the completion of online module change appears MELSOFT series GX Developer x e UI Online module change completed Figure 10 11 Dialog box informing the completion of online module change 1 0 9 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 10 3 1 When the initial setting has been configured with GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE ME
22. USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the
23. Unlike the latest error code setting Error clear request YF or Operating condition setting request Y9 to on does not clear the error history The error history remains without powering on or resetting CPU modules 6 37 6 39 Latest Address of Error History Un G1800 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G Kel ceries 6 41 CH1 Logging Data Storage Area Un G5000 to Un G14999 if Logged data can be checked by using the logging facility Refer to Section 4 2 7 4 gt For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 5 z a Even if CH1 Logging data storage area Un G5000 to Un G14999 becomes full the data will be written over from the start area for logging data Zz b If CH1 Logging hold request Y1 is set to off while CH1 Logging hold flag X1 is E set to on data logging will restart However the logged data will not be cleared E cs POINT Setting Operating condition setting request Y9 to on clears the logging data of all the channels z z O L T D Zz O 2 mi v H 2a gS Yi QE ez gt ow Q m x uw LL U ao PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 6 41 CH1 Logging Data Storage Area Un G5000 to Un G14999 6 38 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC TA cries CHAPTER7 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING 7 1 Handling Precautions 1 Do not drop or apply stro
24. e Set the value in 0 1 increments ii Setting example For setting the input signal error detection setting value to 15 The value 150 is stored into CH1 Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to z Section 5 2 2 3 z ir O 2 Default The input signal error detection setting value is set to O for all the channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration POINT If the input signal error detection setting value using CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 is set to detect disconnections 4 the value set in the z data area of Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 will be ignored v H G F f O2 6 10 CH1 Logging Enable Disable Setting Un G30 28 SS OS Whether to enable or disable data logging is set Refer to Section 4 2 7 3 oF For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 ez 1 Setting method a Set whether to enable or disable data logging by using the buffer memory Table 6 12 Setting range of CH1 Logging enable disable setting Un G30 Setting value Description 0 Enabled 1 Disabled b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 gt a ie WW x W E m aa PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING 2 Default The setting of whether to enable or disable d
25. in the monitor of GX Developer and set the initial setting to enable A D conversion 0 in the sequence program or utility package Section 6 2 BUN 0 8 n 0N CEE CHANGE Has Operating condition setting request Y9 been executed Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to off in GX Developer and check that the values are stored into CH1 Digital output value Un G100 If so review the initial setting of the sequence program or utility package Section 5 2 2 Section 6 17 Is the value set for the averaging processing specification correct If CH1 Averaging process method setting Un G1 is set to average time check that the following conditions are met in the setting CH1 Averaging process time number of times setting Un G2 4 times x 0 5 ms x Number of channels total number of A D conversions and D A conversions If the above requirements are not met 0 is stored into CH1 Digital output value Un G100 APPENDIX Section 6 3 Section 6 4 In the case of current input are terminals V and I connected In the case of current input connect terminals V and I Section 7 4 2 INDEX F lt POINT The module may have failed if the digital output value cannot be read after proper corrective actions have been taken according to the above check items Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem
26. l i Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Generic term for the following Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System PACKING LIST The following is included in the package Model Product name Quantity Q64AD2DA Q64AD2DA analog input output module 1 External power supply connector 1 SW2D5C QADU E GX Configurator AD Version 2 Single license product CD ROM 1 SW2D5C QADU EA GX Configurator AD Version 2 Volume license product CD ROM 1 SW2D5C QDAU E GX Configurator DA Version 2 Single license product CD ROM 1 SW2D5C QDAU EA GX Configurator DA Version 2 Volume license product CD ROM 1 A 13 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER MELSEC TA eries OVERVIEW This user s manual provides the specifications handling instructions programming procedures and other information of the Q64AD2DA analog input output module hereinafter the Q64AD2DA which is designed to use with the MELSEC Q series CPU module 1 1 Features 1 2 3 4 5 6 Analog input and output using a module The Q64AD2DA can perform both A D conversion using four channels and D A conversion using two channels Ranges can be set for each channel Various voltage or current range can be set for each channel Also the ranges can
27. pay attention to the following 1 Logging cycle setting Before logging data are updated set a cycle allows data to be referred and collected completely and securely 2 Reference timing After the number of logging data to be referred is collected the oldest pointer or the change of the logging data points must be monitored and logging data must be obtained according to the change of the storage values Ee POINT If the relationship between the logging cycle and the scan time of the CPU modules causes data not to be updated and referred simultaneously adjust the logging cycle A short logging cycle may cause logging data to be updated in referring or collecting data To refer to data regardless of the logging cycle perform logging hold 4 24 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 7 Logging function 4 FUNCTION MELSEG Esnie 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion 4 3 1 D A output enable disable function OVERVIEW Set whether D A conversion values are output or offset values are output for each channel 1 Setting methods CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 can be used Table 4 10 D A output enable disable function CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 Output enabled ON Outputs D A conversion values Output disabled OFF Outputs offset values CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Analog output 2 D A output enable disable function and the conversion speed The conversion speed is calculated by th
28. s O Initial setting fr Module information Yn Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q644D2DA Setting item Setting value A D conversion area CH1 Initial setting CH1 Initial setting CH2 Initial setting CH2 Initial setting CH3 Initial setting CH3 Initial setting Zz CH4 Initial seting CHA Initial setting O D A onan area 5 CHS Initial setting CH5 Initial setting zZ Ww Details 8 3 Z Make text file End setup Cancel 5 a Ow QE A D conversion CH1 to CH4 D A conversion CH5 CH6 amp v v O CH1 Initial setting ai CH5 Initial setting Module information Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 ad Module model name 064AD2DA Module model name Q644D2D4 wW Setting item Setting value B Setting item Setting value E CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Disable CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Disable D CH1 Averaging process method setting Sampling processing CHS D A conversion scaling enable disable setting Disable a CH1 Averaging process time number of times setting CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit value ri eerie one to 60 CHS D A conversion scaling upper limit value CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Disable CHS Shifting amount to input value CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value a CHT A D conversion scaling upper limit value 2 yo Ot Details Details Select input Sel
29. time number of times setting Sampling processing 0 Time averagina 2 to 10000 Count averaging 4 to 20000 Move averaging 2 to 60 CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Disable CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value CH1 A D conversion scaling upper limit value Details Select input Setting range Enable Disable Make text file End setup Cancel Refer to Section 8 4 Figure 8 5 Operation overview 8 3 Operating the Utility Package 8 3 2 Operation overview UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEG iQ series frontne Monitor Test Select monitor test module dialog box Select monitor test module r Select monitor test module Module type Start 1 0 No 0000 n Mod Module model name QE4AD2DA z Module implementation status Start 1 0 No O000 G644D2D4 Module model name Monitor Test Select a module to be monitored tested Monitor Test window Monitor Test Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q644D2DA Setting tem Current value A D conversion area Setting value CH1 A D conversion completed flag CH2A D conversion completed flag CH3 A D conversion completed flag CH4 A D conversion completed flag CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value CH3 Digtal
30. 1 Overview e The shifting amount to input value can be set within the range from 32768 to 32767 If a scaling function for D A conversion is used simultaneously scaling will be performed after shifting e If the shifted values exceed the range from 32768 to 32767 the values will be fixed to the upper limit 32767 and lower limit 32768 respectively e CH5 Real conversion digital value Un G902 indicates a digital input value that scaling and shifting are performed Refer to Section 4 3 4 e If the shifted values exceed the settable digital ranges corresponding to the set output ranges the D A conversion will be performed according to Table 4 15 e Changing the shifting amount to input value reflects the analog output value in real time Therefore the analog output value can be adjusted with the shifting function when the CPU is powered on Table 4 15 Settable range corresponding to the output ranges and processing of digital values exceeding settable range Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Output range Processing for the case of Processing for the case of e Settable range ae Settable range ae setting written digital values written digital values Real range g Real range i exceeding settable range exceeding settable range OH 4 to 20mA 1H 0 to 20mA 96 to 4095 4096 or more 4095 288 to 12287 12288 or more 12287 2H 1 to 5V Real range 0 to 4000 97 or less 96 Real range 0 to 12000 28
31. 1 to 5V 0 Figure 9 5 Intelligent function module switch setting Output range setting CH5 and CH6 3 Switch 3 Setting of the analog output HOLD CLEAR function CH5 and CH6 lt Switch 3 gt o a fo n CH6 CH5 TE Fixed CH5 0H CLEAR to OH CH6 1H HOLD Figure 9 6 Intelligent function module switch setting Setting of the analog output HOLD CLEAR function CH5 and CH6 4 Switch 4 Resolution setting 0 lt Switch 4 gt 0 1 0 JO 4 Fixed S to OH Fixed to OH All channels 1H High resolution mode Figure 9 7 Intelligent function module switch setting Resolution setting 5 Switch 5 Use prohibited Fixed to OH lt Switch 5 gt o fo ol o w Fixed to OH Figure 9 8 Intelligent function module switch setting Use prohibited 9 7 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 2 1 Before program creation Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres b Switch setting for function module Click on Switch setting button in the I O assignment tab of the parameter setting dialog box of GX Developer to display the dialog box shown below then set switches 1 to 5 PROGRAMMING Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format FSS 2 Q fal CS FL Wo 1 foro intelli Q644D2DA z ehen fie faxo z 3 22 Output ovio OU e Figure 9 9 In
32. 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 10 3 1 When the initial setting has been configured with GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEG TA eres d Set CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO or CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 to Enable 0 and turn off and then on Operating condition setting request Y9 1 A D conversion CH1 to CH4 Monitor CH1 Digital output value Un G100 to check if A D conversion is properly performed 2 D A conversion CH5 and CH6 Set CH5 Digital input value Un G802 and turn off and then on CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 to check if D A conversion is properly performed Be careful since analog values will be output oO PROGRAMMING 1 w l Q O y w zS sc ZI OoOO Monitor Test Module information oO Module type A D Conversion Module Start 120 No 0000 Z Module model name Q64AD2DA g as 2 Setting item Current value Setting value a A D conversion area oO CH1 A D conversion completed flag D gt CH2A D conversion completed flag 2 CH3 A D conversion completed flag Completed CH4 A D conversion completed flag No completed CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value CH3 Digital output value CH4 Digital output value CH1 Scaling value CH2 Scaling value Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring x Cannot execute test a Make text file W oO oa lt
33. 2 2 When ERR LED turns on or blinkg eseeesseessseesseccooccocesoecssoecooocsocsssocsseccooecooessoesse 11 5 11 2 3 When ALM LED blinks sseessseesseeseecsoccsoecsooocoocccocsssossecsooccooocsocsssecsseccsoesosesseesse 11 5 11 2 4 When digital output values cannot be read sseeeeesesseeeeeesseseeecoeoeoocsceceecooooocececoesoososeee 11 G 11 2 5 When A D conversion completed flag does not turn on during use in normal mode eeeeeeeeees 11 7 11 2 6 When an analog output value is not output eeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeceeececcecceccecococceocecceeccoccocceoe 11 7 11 2 7 Checking the Q6E4AD2DA status eseeseeseeeseseeeoococecocoeccococceocoooosccecoccosoocecocoesooseceeoe 11 B A 10 APPENDIX App 1 to App 2 Appendix 1 External Dimensions COOOL OO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOCE App 1 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 ABOUT MANUALS The following manuals are also related to this product Order each manual as needed referring to the following list Relevant Manuals Manual number Manual name model code GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Describes the methods for creating printing monitoring and debugging programs with GX SH 080373E Developer 13JU41 Sold separately GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Function Block i ie i SH 080376E Describes the methods for creating and printing function blocks with GX Developer 13JU44 Sold separat
34. 3 30mV 0 1 10mV tL S 10 to 10V D analog output value z 0 to 20mA L 9 9 5 OANA 0 3 604A 0 1 204A O Conversion speed 500 us channel Absolute maximum z Voltage 12V Current 21mA output Output short circuit gt f Available 5 protection me Specific isolated EZI ELOI fi as Insulation Dielectric withstand voltage k area method resistance i Between input 53 terminal and O e Photocoupler l 500VDC 20Me og programmable f 500VACrms 1min g5 isolation or more Am 3 PNS controller power 96 Insulation specifications Oy supply ge Between input output channels Between external Zi z S power supply and 5 analog input output Number of I O occupied points 16 points I O assignment Intelligent 16 points ow j A D conversion area D A conversion area 18 points terminal block He External connection system 5 External power supply 24VDC FG terminal connection External power supply connector ira A d A D conversion area D A conversion area 0 3 to 0 75mm Applicable cable size External power supply 24VDC FG terminal connection Refer to Table 3 2 3 a A D conversion area D A conversion area R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with sleeves are Applicable solderless terminals unavailable a External power supply 24VDC FG terminal connection Not available T x 24VDC 15 Zuz Ripple spike 500mVP P or less GO Extemalipower supply Inrush current 2 5A 1504s or less D Current consumption 0 19A Internal
35. 3 When ALM LED blinks Table 11 7 When ALM LED blinks y p Reference Check item Corrective action j section Section Has an input signal error occurred Check CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 6 23 11 5 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 When RUN LED turns off 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 4 When digital output values cannot be read AG el series Table 11 8 When digital output values cannot be read Check item Is 24VDC external supply power being supplied Corrective action Check that External power off flag X6 is set to on and supply 24VDC external supply power to the external power supply connector terminal Reference PROGRAMMING section Section 5 2 1 Section 7 4 3 Is there any fault with the analog signal lines such as disconnection or wire break Check for faulty condition of the signal lines by a visual check and a continuity check CHAPTER 7 Is the CPU module in the STOP status Set the CPU module to the RUN status Is the input range setting correct Check CH1 Setting range Un G112 in the monitor of GX Developer If the input range setting is incorrect reset the intelligent function module Switch 1 setting in GX Developer Section 6 21 Section 7 5 2 MEW ONLINE MODULE Is CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO set to A D conversion disabled 1 Check CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO
36. 6 1 1 OVERVIEW 1 Setting method a Set data to be logged by using the buffer memory Table 6 15 Setting range of CH1 Logging data setting Un G33 Setting Description Description details value 0 Digital output value Logs CH1 Digital output value Un G100 1 Scaling value Logs CH1 Scaling value Un G102 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default Scaling values 1 are set for all channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration SPECIFICATIONS 6 13 CH1 Logging Points After Trigger Un G34 The amount of data to be logged after the occurrence of a hold trigger is set during the logging facility use Refer to Section 4 2 7 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 FUNCTION 1 Setting method a Set an amount of data to be logged by using the buffer memory Settable range 0 to 9999 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 ez 2 Default The value 5000 is set for all channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration gt ow Q Ww x W U U ao PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 6 12 CH1 Logging Data Setting Un G33 6 16 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG
37. 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING M als AG cries Table 9 13 List of used buffer memory addresses A T Setting o Address device Description Remarks 2 value Z e Measured CH5 Digital input 2 Un G802 D31 CH5 Digital input value oe value is stored 2 CH6 D A conversion enable disable x Un G1000 D1050 0 Enable CH6 setting See Measured CH6 Digital input Un G1002 D32 CH6 Digital input value value is stored Ain CH6 D A conversion scaling enable 5 Un G1010 D1060 0 Q disable setting z CH6 D A conversion scaling lower limit Set these items to use CH6 O Un G1011 D1061 1000 545Z value Scaling function Z CH6 D A conversion scaling upper limit S9 Un G1012 D1062 5000 value The buffer memory address g Un G1800 D3000 Latest address of error history storing the latest error code is 5 stored z Un G1810 D3010 Error history 1 T The error code of the current m oO N error is stored 2 Un G1960 D3160 Error history 16 E 3 GX Developer operation setting of the network parameter e Network type MNET H Remote master e Starting I O No 0000H x Q e Network No 1 a Q e Total stations 1 g e Mode On line e Network range assignment M station gt R station M station lt A station StationNo Y T x x Points Start End Points Start End
38. Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 6 17 CH1 Digital Output Value Un G100 Un G1700 6 20 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 18 CH1 Scaling Value Un G102 Un G1710 Scaled for A D conversion and shifted for A D conversion values scaling value using CH1 Digital output value Un G100 are stored For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 and Section 6 1 3 1 Stored data a Storage form Digital values are stored into the buffer memory in 16 bit signed binary form b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Data part CH1 Scaling value Un G102 Sign bit 1 Negative value 0 Positive value Figure 6 5 Storage data of CH1 Scaling value Un G102 b Updating cycle Refer to Section 4 2 1 The updating cycle is the time for sampling processing number of channels to be used x 5004s EIPOINT If the scaled and shifted values exceed the range from 32768 to 32767 the upper limit value will be 32767 and the lower limit value will be 32768 6 21 6 18 CH1 Scaling Value Un G102 Un G1710 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC IA series 6 19 CH1 Maximum Digital Output Value Un G104 Un G1720 and CH1 Minimum Digital Output Value Un G106 Un G1721 W g The maximum and minimum digital output values converted are stored 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Sectio
39. Details of A D Conversion 4 15 4 2 5 Input signal error detection function 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 4 2 6 Input range extended mode function The input range extended mode function is the function increasing the input range of 4 to 20mA and 1 to 5V Table 4 4 Input range and digital output value for extended mode CH1 Digital output value Increased CH1 Digital output value Input range Input range Input range Un G100 range Un G100 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Extended 0 0 to 22 0mA 96 to 4095 mode 1096 to 4595 288 to 12287 1 to 5V 3288 to 13787 1 to 5V 1 to 5V Extended 0 0 to 5 5V mode 1 The values in parenthesis refer to the range of digital outputs for setting high resolution mode 1 Overview a The input range extended mode function can monitor the values that fall below 4mA or 1V so that sensors do not measure concrete values b The slopes of the lines representing I O characteristic are same between the extended mode and the normal mode However the input range expands and the upper and lower limit values of CH1 Digital output value Un G100 extend in the extended mode 4595 13787 aA Sos ea ene RRR yanam 4595 13787 4500 13500 4500 13500 4000 12000 4000 12000 2 gt gt 5 5 Q Qa 5 5 E 2 2 gt a a 0 0 1000 3000 1000 3000 1096 3288 1096 3288 Expanded range Expand
40. Digital output la nen pan Enen pany e value Un G100 0 le iC ae ae ae a a 4 A D conversion ON completed flag XE Data transition in buffer memory E 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c Z 1 2 3 4 gt 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 6 4 4 4 on Figure 4 1 Moving average processing in the case of four setting times Q 2 2 65 Yi Se Q W f2 W mE uw 5 a Q A Oor ES vao RoE GOE X u aan UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 5 4 2 1 A D conversion methods 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 4 2 2 Maximum and minimum values hold function The maximum and minimum digital output value and scaling value are held in the buffer memory for each channel 1 Setting methods a The maximum and minimum values are stored into the following buffer memory when conversions start e CH1 Maximum digital output value Un G104 e CH1 Minimum digital output value Un G106 e CH1 Maximum scaling value Un G108 e CH1 Minimum scaling value Un G110 b The maximum and minimum values are stored into the buffer memory after the following states e Maximum and minimum values reset request YD is set to on e Operating condition setting request Y9 is set to off 4 2 3 Scaling function A D conversion This function converts digital output values to scaling values ra
41. FB of the intelligent function module parameter initial setting auto z refresh setting and paste it to the sequence program E E According to the system specifications configure the initial setting auto refresh ze setting of the intelligent function module by either of the above methods 26 1 The following explains when both 1 and 2 settings are configured a Initial setting 2 Setting of 2 will be valid 2 b Auto refresh setting S Both 1 and 2 settings will be valid 3 Auto refresh is performed at execution of an FB and END processing of the sequence D program Zz O O zZ mi v H 2a Ge Yi Se O W th T a a A g Or ES vao Roe GOE X wW aag e e x 9 la t S 5 2 g E Q x W ZSF Ed S55 a2s tes S D aE EI Q FEAS 8 8 Usage of FB 8 24 8 8 1 Overview UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEC KY i 8 8 2 Pasting an FB to a sequence program Purpose Paste an FB to use it in a sequence program Operating procedure Switch the Project tab to the FB tab in GX Developer and drag and drop an FB on the sequence program Before pasting i7 MELSOFT series GX Developer C MELSEC Gppw FB LD Edit mode MAIN 124 Step DAR omer Vew Crime Dinosks Toae Widow Heb 5x ajae ue mee aslla i folate al al E A EA Bl Lele Les celal ler lag R E p Ba by A i S
42. M312 1 M311 B 4 f RST m2 Y100F X100F X1007 7 _ J de RST Y100F J MCR NO 1 END Figure 9 24 Program example without using GX Configurator AD continued 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package MELSECTA cries Resets Input signal error detection signal X1007 Sets digital input values of CH5 and CH6 Enables analog output of CH5 and CH6 Obtains error history latest address Outputting error codes with BCD Turns on Error clear request Y100F Turns off Error clear request Y100F 9 34 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX INDEX 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TA cries CHAPTER10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 1 When changing a module online carefully read the Online module change section in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection This chapter explains the specifications of the online module change Precautions This chapter explains using device numbers X Y and buffer memory addresses for CH1 and CH5 Apply the same operations when changing a module online using other channels For device numbers and buffer memory addresses for other channels refer to Section 5 1 and Section 6 1 Change a module online with GX Developer E POINT 1 2 3 4 Perform an online module change after making sure that the system outside the programmab
43. MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA D I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE CHAPTERS 5 1 MELSEC TA eries I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE List of I O Signals Table 5 1 lists the I O signals of the Q64AD2DA Note that I O numbers X Y shown in this chapter and thereafter are the values when the start I O number for the Q64AD2DA is set to 0 Table 5 1 List of I O signal Signal direction CPU module Q64AD2DA Signal direction CPU module Q64AD2DA Bees minor Pa es Rar eae Module ready Use prohibited a X1 CH1 Logging hold flag Y1 CH1 Logging hold request X2 CH2 Logging hold flag Y2 CH2 Logging hold request X3 CH3 Logging hold flag Y3 CH3 Logging hold request X4 CH4 Logging hold flag Y4 CH4 Logging hold request X5 Use prohibited Y5 CH5 Output enable disable flag X6 External power off flag Y6 CH6 Output enable disable flag X7 Input signal error detection signal Y7 athe ad X8 High resolution mode status flag Y8 Useprohibitad X9 Operating condition setting completion flag Y9 Operating condition setting request XA YA XB Use prohibited YB Use prohibited XC YC xD Maximum and minimum values reset YD Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag request XE A D conversion completed flag YE Use prohibited XF Error flag YF Error clear request POINT 1 These signal
44. O signals Buffer memory write condition 1 Y9 x9 i U0 i i wv o o Write Operating Operating condition I request condition setting completion flag i Setting request Figure 6 3 Setting example of interlock condition 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G el ceries 4 Error history Un G1800 to Un G1964 Table 6 4 Error history Un G1800 to Un G1964 z ag i Data i P w Item Address decimal type History number Description Default Read write 2 5 ype 1800 Md Latest address of error history 0 R 1801 to System area Zz O 1809 g 1810 Error code 4811 First two digits Last two digits of a of the year the year E 1812 Md history 1 Error time Month Day s R ee 1813 Hour Minute 1814 Second Day of the week 1815 n Z to System area G 1819 S 1820 Error code L O 1821 First two digits Last two digits of m of the year the year 2 1822 va HSN Eroriine Month Day o R 1823 Hour Minute 1824 Second Day of the week 1825 to System area z 1829 2 O 1830 Error code JBA First two digits Last two digits of Be Error history of the year the year 1832 Md Pe aceite Month Day R 1833 Hour Minute ae S 5 1834 Second Day of the week P a 1835 2 Z a to Sys
45. OOO OO OOC OOOO OOO OS OOOCE 6 1 2 C Count average COCO OOOOOOOOEOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOS 4 4 D Digital input value UN G802 seeseseseecesesesceseees 6 3 Digital output value Un G100 Un G1700 eses9 9 6 20 DISCONNECTION CETECTION eeeeeccccccccccccccccccccccccce 4 17 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 D A conversion scaling enable disable setting UM G810 sseececcececceecececcccccccenceecccsseceeeeeeees 6 32 D A Conversion scaling lower limit value Un G811 COCO OOOOOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OS OOOCE 6 33 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 COCO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOEE 6 33 D A output enable disable fUNctionessesseeeeeeeeeeee 4 25 E EMC and Low Voltage Directives sseesesseseeseA 12 7 6 Error clear request YF cooooooooooooooo000000000000000 D10 Error code list eeeeesccocoooo00000000000000000000000000 _ Error flag XF ocoooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000 5 8 Error time Un G191 to UN G194 sseeeeesseeeeee000 6 29 ERR LED cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce 7 4 External dimensions eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce App 1 External power off flag X6 ccoooooooooooooooo000000000 5A External power supply connector e eseeeeesseeeeesseoe 7 4 External wiring coooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000 7 3 F FB 0000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 2 8 23 FB co
46. OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOOC 8 21 8 8 Usage of FBecccccococoooococoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo000o00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 23 8 8 1 Overview COCO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOOH OOO OO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOCCE 8 23 8 8 2 Pasting an FB to a sequence program COCOOOOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOO OOO OOO OO OOOOOOE 8 25 8 8 3 Converting compiling a sequence program COCO OOOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOS 8 26 CHAPTERI PROGRAMMING 9 1to9 34 9 1 Programming Procedures 0coooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 0 2 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration coooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 _ 4 9 2 1 Before program Creation ececccccccoooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 _ G 9 2 2 Program example using the utility package coooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 _ Q 9 2 3 Program example without using the utility package ccooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000 9 15 9 3 Programming for Remote 1 0 Network eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccccccccsooooces Q 19 9 3 1 Before program Creation ecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvccccoccccccccccvcccccecccococococccccosocoocooos Q 21 9 3 2 Program example
47. Package 8 2 1 Precautions for use UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Example Counting the number of set parameters in the auto refresh setting Auto refresh setting Module information W Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No Z Module model name Q644D2D4 Ww gt e Module side Module side Transfer PLC side SESE Buffer size Transfer direction Device tH Sista encanto conven vee i CH2 Shifting amount to conversion value E CH3 Shifting amount to conversion value This one row is counted as one setting dali ia ea Nis Blank rows are not counted E CHT Digital output value 5 f 5 5 E THD Dipial ouput valve 5 Count up all the setting items on this g CH3 Digtal output value window and add the total to the number z EARE of settings for other intelligent function E E CH1 Scaling value Yn modules to get a grand total 5 3 Make text file End setup Cancel Figure 8 2 Parameter setting Auto refresh setting window o Z O z o ue O W Q o z O o Zz 5 w 2 Z 2a 906 Yi T SE amp 0 W f2 W mE uw 5 a Q Z Zo W or sao oe RE mioj X u aaw e e x 9 la t S 5 2 g E Q x W ZSF Ed TE a2s tes S D aE E w Q FEAS 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 8 4 8 2 1 Precautions for use UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX 8 2 2 Operating en
48. Points Start End Points Start End 1 256 1000 10FF 256 oooo OOFF 256 1000 10FF 256 oooo OOFF M station gt R station M station lt R station M station gt A station ___M station lt R station a x lt StationNo W W Points Points Points a 1 i60 oo00 0099F Figure 9 22 Network range assignment screen e Refresh parameters Link side PLC side a Dev nane Ports Sat End Dem Pons _Siat Transfer SB 0000 O1FF gt eae ho Transfer SW _ FF gt FE Random cyclic LB ae Random cyclic Transfer 8192 Transfer Transfer3 Transfer4 TransferS Transfer6 Figure 9 23 Refresh parameter screen 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 30 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING 4 Program example 1 Checking remote I O station operation status B47 K ee T 00 T100 B49 K3 11 T101 SW70 0 K4 j T102 SW74 0 K3 RR i SW78 0 K3 a T 104 B20 RST M103 T100 i RST M104 T101 T102 T103 T104 T100 T101 T102 T103 M100 M101 NO M100 M101 X1000 1 PLS M102 RST M101 SET M103 RST M104 RST M282 2 Initial setting of CH1 A D conversion enable setting M102 KO D1000 K1 M200 M200 M201 j via SET M202 Figure 9 24 Program example without using GX Configurator AD 9 31 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 3 3 Program example without usin
49. Q64AD2DA status 1 How to check error with GX Developer The error code LED status and setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting can be checked in GX Developer PROGRAMMING a Detailed information of module Select Diagnostics System monitor Q64AD2DA Module s Detailed Information The latest error is displayed in the Present Error field i When the button is clicked the latest eight error codes are displayed 1 MEW ONLINE MODULE BUN 0 2 8 n CONN iCmmm CHANGE Check the nine or more than nine error codes in the buffer memory 2 Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name Q644D2DA 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Product information 110310000000000 C Module Information Module access Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Fuse Status Noise Filter Setting Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Input Type Remote password setting status Error Display Display format oe Present Enor 6002 e ie Display format x A Cea The error codes shown a The display sequence of the rror history is from the oldest error in Section 11 1 are formatted ee The latest error is displayed inthe line as under with decimal number xt Since the display format is set to the default of HEX select DEC lt HAW Information Stje monitor u 2 Error code display Latest eight error codes are displayed These err
50. RUN LED of the module turned off remove the terminal block external power supply connector and then the module 4 POINT Always remove the module If mounting status is checked without the module being removed the module will not properly start and the RUN LED will not turn on 1 0 11 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 10 3 2 When the initial setting has been configured with sequence program ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC Kel ceries 3 Mounting a new module a Mount a new module on the same slot and install a terminal block and external power supply connector b After mounting the module click the button and make sure that the RUN LED turns on Module ready X0 remains off Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H E as Module name Q644D2D4 Installation confirmation Status Module control restart F Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Figure 10 16 Online module change mounting check dialog box 4 Operation check a To check operations click the button and see if the restart of control is canceled Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H Hs aes Module name Q644D2DA Installation confirmation Status Module control restart 7 A k Change module installation completion Status Guidanc
51. Setting cooocoooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 7 3 Part Names c0ooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 7 4 Wiring ccoooooooooooooooo0o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 7 4 1 Wiring precautions ccooooooooooooooo0o0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 7 4 2 External wiring cooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 7 4 3 Wiring of external power supply CONNECHOSeesececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccoccccocoosocooocs 9 7 5 Setting from GX Developer COCOCOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOO 7 12 7 5 1 Intelligent function module detailed SEttingerreccccccccccccccccsccccccsccccccsocsccccocsccccoccoocsoocs 7 12 7 5 2 Intelligent function module switch SEtting ccrcccecccccccccccccccccccscccsccsccccocscccvccsoccsocsoccsoocs 7 14 7 6 Offset Gain Correction COCOCOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOO OOOO OO OOCE 7 16 CHAPTERS UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR AD GX CONFIGURATOR DA 8 1 to 8 26 8 1 Utility Package Functions ocoooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 J 1 8 2 Installing an
52. Shifting function A D Conversion sssesesseeseseeseee 4 9 Shifting function D A Conversion sssesseseeseeseeeee 4 31 Software version ececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce 2 4 2 8 Status CHECK eececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccccce 1 9 T Time AVETAGE sereececccccccccccccocccccccccsccccocsccccecs 4 3 Trigger data Un G36 ocooooooooooooooooo00000000000000 5 1 O Trigger pointer Un G123 oooooooooooooo00000000000000 5 79 Trigger setting value UN G37 ssescesescesccceccccees 6 19 W Wiring of external power supply connector eeesseee 7 9 Index 2 Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment
53. T T T T T T T T T T T T Year 2009 Un G191 aa roto ul 1 1 2009H Year b15 b12b11 b8b7 b4b3 _ bO Example 492 Prot foot Jott t 7 11 a duly 34st 7 31 Died BOORSEPOSESREDE 073th Month Day b15 b12b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0Example T T T T ji T T T T i T T 10 35 i i 1 i i 1 i 1 i i i 1 uoga A A A wes eee Hour Minute b15 b12b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 Example Rii TE T 1 148 seconds Friday poi tie i 4805H Second Fixed to 0H Day GFHE week Un G194 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 6 29 6 28 CH1 Latest Error Code Un G190 CH1 Error Time Un G191 to Un G194 Latest Error Code Un G1790 and Error Time Un G1791 to Un G1794 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC IA series EIPOINT 1 The data of error time are stored into CH1 Error time Un G191 to Un G194 and Error time Un G1791 to Un G1794 on the basis of the CPU module time information If the error time is wrong check the time setting of the CPU module 2 When using network modules the error time may not be stored as follows When using the Q64AD2DA in the MELSECNET H remote I O network the time information is transferred as shown below Therefore the sequence of power supply for the system and the error timing may result in storing wrong information at the point of error occurrence e CPU module MELSECNET H master module MELSECNET H remote module gt Q64AD2DA OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYST
54. TA eres 6 14 CH1 Level Trigger Condition Setting Un G35 Conditions for using level triggers is set during the logging facility use Refer to Section 4 2 7 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set a condition for using a level trigger by using the buffer memory Table 6 16 Setting range of CH1 Level trigger condition setting Un G35 Setting Vee aoe Description Timing of occurrence of level trigger value Disable A hold trigger occurs only when CH1 Logging hold request Y1 is set to on CH1 Trigger data Un G36 gt CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 Trigger data When the amount of trigger data exceeds the trigger 1 Above setting value a level trigger miggen oi eta ee au citrine setting value K occurs Trigger occurrence gt Time CH1 Trigger data Un G36 lt CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 Trigger data When the amount of trigger 2 Balbw data falls below the trigger Trigger occurrence setting value a level trigger Trigger AM setting value occurs gt Time If either of the following 1 or 2 is satisfied a level trigger will occurs 1 If the condition Current value of CH1 Trigger data Un G36 gt CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 is satisfied under the condition Previous value of CH1 Trigger data Un G36 CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 2 If the condition Current value of CH1
55. Trigger data Un G36 lt CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 under the condition Previous value of CH1 Trigger When th t of tri On Me amoun or figger data Un G36 CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 3 Pass data reaches to the trigger l through setting value a level trigger Tagor ae Togel as occurs Trigger occurrence 2 Trigger 22222222222 Trigger LN setting value setting value rigger occurrence 1 gt pe Time Time b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 6 17 6 14 CH1 Level Trigger Condition Setting Un G35 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G Kel ceries 2 Default The level trigger condition setting is set to be made invalid 0 for all the channels fa CH1 to CH4 in default configuration POINT 1 When using the level trigger set the level trigger condition using CH1 Level trigger condition setting Un G35 to meet the following variations e Above 1 aio e Below 2 38 e Pass through 3 2 If CH1 Level trigger condition setting Un G35 is set to 0 be disabled the following processing will be performed 9 e The CH1 Trigger data Un G36 and CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 2 settings will not be reflected S e Setting CH1 Logging hold request Y1 to on will hold the data logging 3 oO N Zz fe O zZ mi v H 2a ae Yi QE ez gt ow Q m x uw LL U ao PROCEDURES A
56. Voltage CH3 z O Current CH5 Output Voltage CH6 0 zZ se D Wiring diagram z Ww al faa Q64AD2DA 2 RUN ALM X ERR cHt 4 N CHS D A External device A p jeer CDF ow i oC CH1I o i x lt aa Ney a External devi Ep fi 5 a xternal device 2 eer bE Street st Ae Le I 77 CH3 V R External device for CH5 External device oe A CH3 V p 7 for CH3 er j O LE V q cou 5 is gt x lt E i g i z H 6 Grounding with FG terminal NX y DC24V External power supply Figure 9 3 Wiring example for the program examples 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 6 9 2 1 Before program creation Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Refer to Section 7 5 2 Based on the setting conditions given in Section 9 2 2 configure the intelligent function module switch setting a Switch settings 1 Switch 1 Input range setting CH1 to CH4 lt Switch 1 gt 0 J2 JA o 4 CH4CH3 CH2 CH1 L CH1 0H 4 to 20mA CH2 AH 4 to 20mA Extended mode CH3 2H 1 to 5V CH4 0H Default value Figure 9 4 Intelligent function module switch setting Input range setting CH1 to CH4 2 Switch 2 Output range setting CH5 and CH6 lt Switch 2 gt o 2 o n CH6 CH5 o Fixed L _ CH5 0H 4 to 20mA to OH CHE 2H
57. area B whenever new data are stored The numeric value 1 increases every time So or Se ez gt ow Q Ww x W U U ao PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 6 24 CH1 Oldest Pointer Un G120 6 26 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 25 CH1 Latest Pointer Un G121 In the logging data storage area an address of buffer memory storing the latest data can be checked Refer to Section 4 2 7 4 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Stored data The difference between the numeric value of the address storing the latest data and the numeric value of the start address in the logging data storage area is stored Storage example When the value to be stored into CH2 Latest pointer Un G121 is 8550 CH2 Logging data storage area Un G15000 Un G23550 Latest data Oldest data gt Un G23551 23550 15000 8550 Un G24999 Figure 6 9 Status of CH2 Logging data storage area Un G15000 to Un G24999 POINT CH1 Latest pointer Un G121 moves to the next area whenever data logging starts and new data are stored The numeric value 1 increases every time 6 27 6 25 CH1 Latest Pointer Un G121 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G Kel ceries 6 26 CH1 Logging Data Points Un G122 An amount of data stored in the logging data storage area can be checked
58. by user to reset an error Y20 to Y2F Error code display 4 digits in BCD QY10 Y20 to Y2F 9 15 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 2 3 Program example without using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING 2 List of used buffer memory addresses Table 9 8 List of used buffer memory addresses MELSEC A eres PROGRAMMING o e Setting Address Description Remarks value Un GO CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting O Enable CH1 Measured CH1 Scaling value Un G102 CH1 Scaling value is stored E 5 Completion status of the first A D Q Un G113 CH1 A D conversion completed flag Q conversion of CH1 is stored z w Un G200 CH2 A D conversion enable disable setting O Enable CH2 Z Z Set the process method 6 5 Un G201 CH2 Averaging process method setting 2 CH2 Count average f i Set the average number of o CH2 Averaging process time number of Un G202 50 processes times when count times setting O average has been set Q CH2 A D conversion scaling enable disable n Un G210 p 0 setting Set these items to use CH2 Scaling a Un G211 CH2 A D conversion scaling lower limit value 1000 function G Un G212 CH2 A D conversion scaling upper limit value 5000 Measured CH2 Scaling value Un G302 CH2 Scaling value is stored f Completion status of the first A D Un G313 CH2 A D conversion completed flag j conv
59. corrected using the scaling function and shift function the functions cannot be used for other applications 3 When a module is replaced online corrected offset gain data are not taken 5 Ke over to a new module Correct the offset gain following the procedures in T gt Figure 7 15 after online change ii nz os n Zz O z O m O W D Zz fe O zZ mi v H 2a ae Yi Se O W m T a 7 a Zz T ao w gt a Ww QO O a 0 Z w N UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 7 6 Offset Gain Correction 7 20 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEC TA eries CHAPTER8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 8 1 Utility Package Functions Table 8 1 lists the functions of the utility package Table 8 1 Function list Description Reference A D conversion area A D conversion enable disable setting Averaging process method setting Averaging process time number of times setting A D conversion scaling enable disable setting A D conversion scaling lower limit value 1 The initial values of the following items are set for each channel a Input signal error detection setting Input signal error detection setting value Logging enable disable setting Logging cycle unit setting Logging cycle setting value Logging data setting Logging points after trigger section Initial set
60. count average has been set CH2 A D conversion scaling enable Un G210 D1013 i 0 disable setting CH2 A D conversion scaling lower limit Set these items to use CH2 Un G211 D1014 1000 value Scaling function CH2 A D conversion scaling upper limit Un G212 D1015 5000 value Measured CH2 Scaling value Un G302 D2302 CH2 Scaling value i is stored Completion status of the first Un G313 D2313 CH2 A D conversion completed flag A D conversion of CH2 is stored CH3 A D conversion enable disable Un G400 D1020 0 Enable CH3 setting Set the process method Un G401 D1021 CH3 Averaging process method setting 3 CH3 Moving average Set the average number of CH3 Averaging process time number of Un G402 D1022 10 moves times when moving times setting average has been set Un G420 D1030 CH3 Input signal error detection setting 1 Set these items to use CH3 Error detection Error detection method CH3 Input signal error detection setting Un G421 D1031 i 100 Upper and lower detection ane Error detection setting range 10 Measured CH3 Scaling value Un G502 D2502 CH3 Scaling value is stored Completion status of the first Un G513 D2513 CH3 A D conversion completed flag A D conversion of CH3 is stored CH3 Error detection status is Un G514 D2514 CH3 Input signal error detection flag stored CH5 D A conversion enable disable Un G800 D1040 tti 0 Enable CH5 setting 9 29
61. current consumption 5VDC 0 17A Weight 0 23kg 1 For the details of the I O conversion characteristic refer to Section 3 2 1 W A 2 Indicates the value of the instant input current that does not break module inner electrical SET resistance The maximum input current value is 24mA when the current is impressed steadily z BS E83 558 3 2 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 The following shows the specifications of the cable applicable to an external power supply connector Table 3 2 Cable applicable to external power supply connector Item Specifications Applicable cable size 3 3mm AWG12 Size when inserting two Single wire 0 2 to 0 8mm x 2 cables into one terminal Stranded wire 0 2 to 0 8mm x 2 Screw tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m External power supply connector accessory Figure 3 1 When inserting two cables into one terminal Remark Sooo ooo ooo For general specifications of the Q64AD2DA refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used eeeeeeceeceeaeneaeneaeneoeaeceeaeceeceeaseeaeseeeae ewe ecaeae eee ee eseeee eae eae ee ee 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 3 2 I O Conversion Characteristic 3 2 1 I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion gt The I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion represents the angle formed by a straight line connecting the offset value and gain v
62. detection signal X7 OFF OFF ON Error clear request YF OFF if Figure 5 5 Timing diagram of CH1 Input signal error detection signal X7 5 5 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 2 1 Input signals 5 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE M aL 2G Q ceries 5 High resolution mode status flag X8 This flag is set to on when the high resolution mode is set in Switch 4 of Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Refer to Section 7 5 2 OVERVIEW 6 Operating condition setting completion flag X9 a This signal is used as an interlock condition to set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on or off when any of the following settings has been changed e CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO e CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 e CH1 Averaging process method setting Un G1 e CH1 Averaging process time number of times setting Un G2 e CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G10 e CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value Un G11 e CH1 A D conversion scaling upper limit value Un G12 e CH5 D A conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G810 e CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit value Un G811 e CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 e CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 e CH1 Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 e CH1 Logging enable disable setting Un G30 e CH1 Logging cycle setting value Un G
63. during the logging facility use Refer to Section 4 2 7 4 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 OVERVIEW 1 Stored data a After data logging starts the value of the buffer memory increases by 1 whenever new data are stored into CH1 Logging data storage area Un G5000 to Un G14999 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b CH1 Logging data storage area Un G5000 to Un G14999 can store up to 10000 data If CH1 Logging data storage area Un G5000 to Un G14999 becomes full the data in the logging data storage area is written over from the start area Consequently the amount of logging data in CH1Logging data points Un G122 is fixed to 10000 SPECIFICATIONS 6 27 CH1 Trigger Pointer Un G123 In the logging data storage area an address of area storing the data at the point of the hold trigger occurrence can be checked Refer to Section 4 2 7 4 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 FUNCTION 1 Stored data The difference between the value of the address of area storing the data at the point of the hold trigger occurrence and the value of the start address in the logging data storage area is stored I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE Storage area When the value to be stored into CH2 Trigger pointer Un G323 is 8550 6 CH2 Logging data storage area gt Un G15000 5 W i i i i fa
64. e CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO e CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 e CH1 Averaging process method setting Un G1 e CH1 Averaging process time number of times setting Un G2 e CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G10 e CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value Un G11 e CH1 A D conversion scaling upper limit value Un G12 e CH5 D A conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G810 e CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit value Un G811 e CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 e CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 e CH1 Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 e CH1 Logging enable disable setting Un G30 e CH1 Logging cycle setting value Un G31 e CH1 Logging cycle unit setting Un G32 e CH1 Logging data setting Un G33 e CH1 Logging points after trigger Un G34 e CH1 Level trigger condition setting Un G35 e CH1 Trigger data Un G36 e CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS b For information on the timing of when Operating condition setting request Y9 is set to on or off refer to the section describing Operating condition setting completion flag X9 Refer to Section 5 2 1 6 S31 FUNCTION 4 Maximum and minimum values reset request YD E 23 2 96 iy r Qz a Set this signal to on when making any of the following buffer memory be cleared e CH1 Ma
65. error 11 2 Troubleshooting 1 1 10 11 2 7 Checking the Q64AD2DA status 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG TA eres The Module s Detailed Information dialog box in GX Developer shows the error history as shown below Up to last eight error history can be checked in the Module s Detailed Information dialog box Newer error codes are displayed in the bottom of the error history field Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name Q64AD2DA Product information 110310000000000 C 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear 7 Hold Settings Fuse Status ae Noise Filter Setting Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Input Type Remote password setting status Error Display leang Display format No EverCode Present Enor 5003 er 1 1002 C HEX Q 2 2 3 2402 4 5003 The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under HZW Information tart Stop monitor Close Figure 11 4 System monitor error history in the case of more than one error 1 1 11 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 7 Checking the Q64AD2DA status APPENDIX MELSEG TA eres APPENDIX zZ Appendix 1 External Dimensions 9 g Q64AD2DA E RUN ALM 2 ERR Q n d a c5 efi zZ Zz 1 che
66. flag X8 5 2 1 Is the resolution mode setting correct A SEE f If the resolution mode setting is incorrect redo the GX Section Developer intelligent function module Switch 4 setting 7 5 2 Check CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Is D A conversion set to be disabled with CH5 D A conversion Un G800 in the monitor of GX Developer and set it to be Section enable disable setting Un G800 enabled with the Developer monitor or set it to Enable 0 6 29 using the sequence program or utility package Check the on or off status of CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 in the monitor of GX Developer Section Is CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 set to off oe If Output enable disable flag is set to off review the initial 5 2 2 setting for the sequence program or utility package Check CH5 Digital input value Un G802 in the monitor of Section Is the digital value being written to the channel to be output GX Developer 6 30 Section Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to off with GX 5 2 2 Has Operating condition setting request Y9 been executed Developer and check that the analog output i normal Section If normal analog output is obtained review the initial 8 4 setting for the sequence program or utility package CHAPTER 9 11 7 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 5 When A D conversion completed flag does not turn on during use in normal mode 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG TA eres 11 2 7 Checking the
67. for the system in all phases before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Undertightening the screws can cause drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions N CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR
68. general specifications of the PRODUCTSs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date Manual number Revision May 2009 SH NA 080793ENG A First edition Dec 2010 SH NA 080793ENG B Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Relevant Manuals GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 1 1 2 1 2 3 3 1 4 2 5 4 2 7 5 2 1 6 17 6 22 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 7 10 1 Warranty Japanese Manual Version SH 080792 D This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers Before using the product please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series programmable controllers to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS secccccccoc000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT seccccooo00000000
69. held CH1 Logging hold flag X1 will be set to on The following shows the timing for the logging to be held 1 A hold trigger detection with Logging hold request signal foScieseeses gt Executed with the Q64AD2DA ON CH1 Logging hold request Y1 OFF ie ON Hold trigger OFF a Logging status In execution x At a stop ON CH1 Logging hold flag X1 OFF 1 Logging points after trigger Figure 5 1 A hold trigger detection with Logging hold request signal 2 A hold trigger detection with Level trigger PS A EEEE gt Executed with the Q64AD2DA ON CH1 Logging hold request Y1 OFF f Level trigger occurrence Non occurrence X After occurrence X ON Hold trigger OFF Bs l Z Logging status In execution XA a stop ON CH1 Logging hold flag X1 OFF 1 Logging points after trigger Figure 5 2 A hold trigger detection with Level trigger b If the logging restarts by setting CH1 Logging hold request Y1 to off CH1 Logging hold flag X1 will be set to off 5 3 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 2 1 Input signals 5 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE MELSEC IA series 3 External power off flag X6 a If an external power supply is not turned on External power off flag X6 will be set to on b If External power off flag X6 is set to on the following processing will be c d f Programmable controller ON F performed 1 Even if
70. hold collecting logging data after logging the number of preset points The necessary setting items vary depending on hold triggers to be used Select one of two types of hold trigger 1 For holding logging in given timing A hold trigger is detected by using Logging hold request Y1 Setting CH1 Logging hold request Y1 to on holds the logging Table 4 7 For detecting hold triggers by using Logging hold request os Reference Item Description 3 section Level trigger condition setting Set the item to be Disable 0 Section 6 14 ON CH1 Logging hold request Y1 _OFF Hold trigger occurred Logging hold a E e a SRN Vv v CH1 Logging data storage area Data stored before the last a i I alec le a I i Logging points after trigger Un G34 4 gt Logging data points Un G122 lt 10000 Figure 4 11 For detecting hold triggers by using Logging hold request 2 For holding logging when given buffer memory meet the setting conditions A hold trigger is detected by using a level trigger Setting CH1 Logging hold request Y1 to on causes the logging data to be trigger condition waiting status set in Table 4 8 and the satisfied trigger condition holds the logging Table 4 8 For detecting hold triggers by using level triggers R Reference Item Description section Level trigger condition setting Set a condition for using level triggers Section 6 14 i Set an address of the buffer memory
71. indicates the setting data and Md indicates the monitoring data 2 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC A eres 6 2 CH1 A D Conversion Enable Disable Setting Un GO Whether to enable or disable A D conversion is set For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later channels refer to Section 6 1 1 OVERVIEW 1 Setting method a Set A D conversion enable disable setting by using the buffer memory Table 6 6 Setting range of CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un G0 Setting value Description 0 A D conversion enabled 1 A D conversion disabled b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 Default A D conversion is disabled 1 for all channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration SPECIFICATIONS 6 3 CH1 Averaging Process Method Setting Un G1 An averaging process method is set Refer to Section 4 2 1 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 FUNCTION 1 Setting method a Set an averaging process method by using the buffer memory Table 6 7 Setting range of CH1 Averaging process method setting Un G1 Setting value Description 0 Sampling processing I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE Time
72. model Displays the module model name set to the open intelligent name function module parameter Initial setting Set whether to convert a parameter into an FB Select the checkbox to convert the parameter into an FB Auto refresh Set whether to convert a parameter into an FB Select the checkbox to convert the parameter into an FB FB program name Set the name of converted FB program Up to six characters can be set as an FB program name The following characters words cannot be used for an FB program name Character Word COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX PRN CON NUL CLOCK When an FB is registered with GX Developer l and A are prefixed to the FB names of the initial setting and auto refresh setting respectively Title Set a title to a converted FB program Up to 32 characters can be set as a title 8 21 8 7 FB Conversion of Initial Setting Auto Refresh UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSECK 2 Command button Converts a selected parameter initial setting auto refresh setting into an FB OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING e e x 9 la t S 5 f g E Q x W ZSF Ed S55 a2s tes S D IE E Q FEAS 8 7 FB Conversion of Initial Setting Auto Refresh 8 22 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Config
73. ofeach _ Input signal error detection Te Input signal error detection _ range upper limit value x 1000 gt setting value Gain value of each range Offset value of each range i Q Z Zo O W ae lt x vao RoE misim EEN TEH X lt BS Sa 235 SEE ace 588 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 13 4 2 5 Input signal error detection function 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres The following table shows lower limit values offset values and gain values calculated in setting input ranges Table 4 3 Lower limit values offset values and gain values calculated by setting input ranges Analog input range Lower limit value Offset value Gain value 0 to 10V OV OV 10V 0 to 5V OV OV 5V Voltage 1 to 5V 1V 1V 5V 10 to 10V 10V OV 10V 1 to 5V Extended mode 1V 1V 5V 0 to 20mA OmA OmA 20mA Current 4 to 20mA 4mA 4mA 20mA 4 to 20mA Extended mode 4mA 4mA 20mA 4 Setting examples of the Input signal error detection Setting example To detect an input signal error when the analog input value is 2 4mA or less which is for the analog input range of the channel is set to 4 to 20mA a Set CH1 Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 The setting values will be turned out when the following values are assigned to the calculating formula of the input signal error detection lower value described in 3 of this section e Input signal error detection lower limit value 2 4mA e Lower limit v
74. on forcibly while the CPU D A Analog output test during a CPU i Da Section 3 module is placed in STOP status the analog value that D A conversion is conversion module STOP 4 3 3 performed is output function l A This function changes an input range of digital input values to a given range Scaling function D A Section between 32000 and 32000 conversion 4 3 4 Time to configure a program for scaling can be decreased The digital input value can be adjusted easily with the shifting function when Shifting function D A the CPU is powered on Section conversion The shifting function adds a setting quantity to a digital input value and stores 4 3 5 the value into buffer memory 1 This function sets whether A D or D A conversion for each channel is enabled or disabled Analog conversion enable 2 Setting the channels not to be used to be disabled decreases sampling Section disable setting periods 4 4 1 3 The analog conversion enable disable setting is set to be disabled for all channels conversion in default configuration Common 1 A resolution can be selected from a normal resolution mode 1 4000 function and high resolution mode 1 12000 or 1 16000 Section 2 Setting a resolution mode is performed for all the channels at once 3 1 Resolution mode 3 For details of a digital output value digital input value and a maximum Section resolution in normal resolution mode or high resolution mode refer to 7 5 Section
75. on the g base unit and make sure that the capacity of the power supply module is enough Reset the programmable controller CPU and check that the RUN LED turns on Has a watchdog timer error occurred If the RUN LED does not turn on the module may have failed Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Is the module mounted correctly on the base unit Check the module mounting status i CHAPTER Is the module in the online module change enable status Refer to CHAPTER 10 and take corrective action 40 Is Empty selected for the slot to be mounted in the I O Secti A ay F Select Intelli for the type of the slot to be mounted again wate assignment tab of the PLC Parameter box in GX Developer 7 5 1 11 2 2 When ERR LED turns on or blinks 1 When ERR LED turns on Table 11 5 When ERR LED turns on i k Reference Check item Corrective action y section Check the error code with CH1 Latest error code S Has an error occurred Un G190 and Latest error code Un G1790 and then a take the corrective action as described in Section 11 1 2 When ERR LED blinks Table 11 6 When ERR LED blinks 7 i Reference Check item Corrective action 3 section Is the setting value of the intelligent function module Switch 5 Set OH for the intelligent function module Switch 5 in Section other than OH GX Developer 7 5 2 11 2
76. output value CH4 Digital output value THT Scaling value CH2 Scaling value Flash ROM setting Details a Monitoring Cannot execute test Start monito Stop monitor Refer to Section 8 6 FB Support Parameter tab FB conversion FB conversion dialog box 2 FB conversion FB program is generated from the following contents 1 Pe FB program name 0000H _ Q64AD2DA oO Start 1 0 Module model I No name Refer to Section 8 7 Figure 8 5 Operation overview continued 8 10 8 3 Operating the Utility Package 8 3 2 Operation overview OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING e e x 9 la t S E e f E Q x g W Q PA lt lt A 238 les SEB EBS 3x E E fo EEAS UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEGIA en 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function module utility Operating procedure Start Intelligent function module utility from GX Developer Select Tools Intelligent function utility gt Start Setting window The following shows a window when the FB Support Parameter tab is activated Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW g6 E Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help Select a target intelligent function
77. related to channels continued Error code Corresponding Error tee i Reference Description Corrective action x section decimal channel e A value less than 32000 is set to CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value Un G11 or CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit Su Section 6 6 value Un G811 Reset the scaling upper or lower limit value to 0401 ne Section A value more than 32000 is set to within 32000 to 32000 6 32 CH1 A D conversion scaling PROGRAMMING upper limit value Un G12 or CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 The value of CH1 A D conversion 1to6 Minor MEW ONLINE MODULE BUN 0 2 8 n 0 0N CEE CHANGE scaling lower limit value Un G11 is set to be equal to or greater than the value of CH1 A D conversion scaling upper limit Section anne value Un G12 Reset the scaling upper and lower limit values 6 31 The value of CH5 D A conversion to Lower limit value lt Upper limit value Section scaling lower limit value 6 32 Un G811 is set to be equal to or greater than the value of CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 1 O indicates the error channel number 1 to 6 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 2 Setting on Error clear request YF does not clear the error code 4 POINT 1 The error code can be cleared by setting Error clear request YF to on during the error o
78. system Version 4 or later 2 Version 1 08J or later lt q Q12H Q25HCPU Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Q 02PH Single CPU system O 2 ve y Version 8 68W or later i QO6PHCPU Multiple CPU system Oo 12PH Single CPU system a i E Y Version 7 10L or later Cannot be used Q25PHCPU Multiple CPU system Q12PRH Redundant CPU Version 8 45X or later Q25PRHCPU system 0 Single CPU system z Speen g y Version 8 76E or later Q01UCPU Multiple CPU system 5 z Zz QUE Single GPU sser Version 2 10L or later Version 2 10L or later T Q04UDH vub eUa Version 8 48A or later QO6UDHCPU pees sa 10UDH Single CPU system lcs g y Version 8 76E or later za Q20UDHCPU Multiple CPU system fa O ingle CPU syst SieuDri Sle CRUSYSIEN A Version 8 62Q or later Version 1 08J or later z Z Q26UDHCPU Multiple CPU system 5 a 7 QO3UDE Single CPU system T Q04UDEH S QO6UDEH Version 8 68W or later Q13UDEH Multiple CPU system gt Q26UDEHCPU t 10UDEH Single CPU system oe 3 Se eee Version 8 76E or later 7 Q20UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system oc Q50UDEH Single CPU system T Cannot be used Cannot be used Cannot be used Version 1 31H or later 5 Q100UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system m Wh ted to MELSECNET H t S moin gae SEC Hremote Version 6 or later Version 2 10L or later Version 2 10L or later Cannot be used I O station 2 1 The setting of intelligent function module parameters for A D conversion and D A conversion the 2 setting status and operating status ca
79. to Section 5 2 1 3 c When reading the digital output values use A D conversion completed flag XE or CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 as an interlock 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 2 1 Input signals 5 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE M el 2G Q ceries 9 Error flag XF a If a write error occurs Error flag XF will be set to on S fie W b To clear the error code set Error clear request YF to on Jishna asss gt Executed with the Q64AD2DA gt Executed with sequence program z O CH1 Latest error code Un G190 X Error 7 ON wir 1 nz OFF OFF aG Error flag XF Error clear request YF OFF OFF _ z z At the moment Error clear request YF turned on Error flag XF is turned off and an error code is cleared 2 O Figure 5 8 Timing diagram of Error flag XF m a z O O zZ 5 u ce as 22 96 iy r o BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 8 5 2 1 Input signals D I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE 5 2 2 MELSEC TA eries Output signals 1 CH1 Logging hold request Y1 2 For information on the output signals for CH2 or later channels refer to Section 5 1 a If the level trigger condition setting using CH1 Level trigger condition setting Un G35 is Disable 0 a logging hold will be perf
80. to X Y100F Y1005 CH5 Output enable disable flag Y1006 CH6 Output enable disable flag Y1009 Operating condition setting request Y100F Error clear request D1000 D1010 to D1015 D1020 to D1022 D1030 D1031 Device to which buffer memory data used in A D conversion channels are written D1040 D1050 Device to which buffer memory data used in D A conversion channels are written D1060 to D1062 D2000 to D2599 Device to which buffer memory data used in A D conversion channels are read D3000 to D3199 Device to which buffer memory error code area is read 9 27 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING Device Function SB20 Table 9 12 Device list Network module status SB47 Host baton pass status SB49 Host data link status SW70 Baton pass status of each station SW74 Cyclic transmission status of each station SW78 Parameter communication status of each station T100 Timer for checking baton pass status of the master station T101 Timer for checking data link status of the master station T102 Timer for checking baton pass status of the remote I O station T103 Timer for checking data link status of the remote I O station T104 Timer for checking refresh status of the remote I O station parameter M100 M101 M102 Master station status check flag Initial setting start trigg
81. to which CH6 Error code is written by auto refresh Device to which a common error code is written by auto refresh D20 Representation error D21 CH1 Scaling read value D22 CH2 Scaling read value D23 CH3 Scaling read value D31 CH5 Initial digital input value D32 CH6 Initial digital input value X0 Module ready X7 XF Y5 Input signal error detection signal Error flag CH5 Output enable disable flag Y6 Y9 CH6 Output enable disable flag Operating condition setting request YF Error clear request Q64AD2DA X Y0 to X YF X10 Device turned on by user to start reading a scaling value X11 Device turned on by user to set initial digital input value X12 Device turned on by user to write digital input value X13 Device turned on by user to enable analog outputs of all channels X14 Device turned on by user to reset input signal error detection X15 Device turned on by user to reset an error QX10 X10 to X1F Y20 to Y2F Error code display 4 digits in BCD 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 2 2 Program example using the utility package QY10 Y20 to Y2F PROGRAMMING 2 Utility package operation a Initial setting Refer to Section 8 4 Set the items shaded in the table below to the initial settings of CH1 to CH3 CH5 and CH6 MELSEC A eres Setting for the items wi
82. using the utility package coooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 CQ 22 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package cocooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000 9 27 CHAPTER10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 1 to 10 14 10 1 Execution Condition of Online Module Change COCO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOOOOOE 10 2 10 2 Operations During Online Module Change COCOCOOOO COO OOOO OOOOH OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOCE 10 3 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change SOHHOHOH SH SHS SH SH SSH SH OHH SHOHHOHOHOHSHOHOHSOHSHOHHHHHHHHOHHOHOSOHHOSOOOOOSD 10 4 10 3 1 When the initial setting has been configured with GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA COCO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO SOO OOO OO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOOS 10 4 10 3 2 When the initial setting has been configured with Sequence Program seseeseeseeseseesecseceeses 10 CHAPTER11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1to 11 11 11 1 Error Code List COCOCOO OOOOH OOOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOOOO SOOOCOOOL OOOOO 11 1 11 2 Troubleshooting COCOOOOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO SOOO OOOO OOOOH HOO OOOO O OOOO OO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOCE 1 1 5 11 2 1 When RUN LED turns Off eesseeesseeseesseeescecsooecoocccoccocecsoecsoecooocsoesssecsseccsocsooessoesss 11 5 11
83. value Digital output value Analog input range normal resolution mode high resolution mode n Zz Q lt q Q u O wW a 2 send Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 1 to 5V 96 288 12287 0 to 5V apes 10 to 10V 4096 16384 16383 0 to 10V 96 384 1 to 5V 1096 4595 3288 13787 Extended mode 2 O H O z u 58 2 Diy Qe ra O Ww ae Ww Wwe Wwe D a E Z 2 o Or ES w ao lt 5 zZ foe X uw aaw x lt o ao TE 3 2 I O Conversion Characteristic 3 6 3 2 1 I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion SPECIFICATIONS MELSEG TA eres 2 Current input characteristic Figure 3 3 shows current input characteristics 1 4 to 20mA Practical analog input range Digital output value Digital output value 2 0 to 20mA Practical analog input range High resolution High resolution mode mode 12287 je t 4 49987 been cen oa eet oe el 1200p Soe SS en ee ee 2000F a ee ee eS Poses l l Normal resolution Normal resolution mode mode l 4095 h l 4098 bn ee ee oe ee Fe 4 E E S ee al S ADO E a e oe See a EE E ee ee l o 1 gt 0 I et eae ll cla eal al al tole ee eee 288 i k 288 eae e eee eee ee ee eH III poo ceeead S 1 D 1 i a l 1 I l I I l i 1 l 1 I i 1 04 20 1 3 4 to 20mA Extended mode 18787 b se Se sec ee See eee
84. value Un G811 1 Input range from 10 to 10V normal resolution 4000 2 Input range from 10 to 10V normal resolution 4000 2 Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on 3 How to calculate a scaling value For the D A conversion the value to be calculated with the following formula will be used If the value cannot be divided the fractional portion of the digital value will be rounded off Dmax Doin Digital values used for D A conversion x Dx SL Din SH SL Dx CH5 Digital input value Un G802 DMax The maximum digital input value in the output range being used DMin The minimum digital input value in the output range being used SH CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 SL CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit value Un G811 4 28 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion 4 3 4 Scaling function D A conversion 4 FUNCTION MELSEC TA eries Setting example Using the scaling function D A conversion in input range from 10 to 10V and high resolution mode from 16000 to 16000 gt a Setting value 2 e CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 SH 14000 e CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit value Un G811 SL 2000 b O b Input value lt Digital input value Dx 7000 8 Ee Digital values used for D A conversion 16000 16000 x 7000 2000 16000 14000 2000 g 2666 66 g 2667 5 Fractional portion i
85. values is averaged resulting in storing into the buffer memory The time required for the count based average value to be stored into the buffer memory varies depending on the number of channels used number of channels enable A D conversion and D A conversion Processing time Set count x Number of channels to be used x 0 5 ms Example Processing time under the following setting e Number of channels used 4CH A D conversion CH1 CH2 and CH3 D A conversion CH5 e Set count 20 times 20 x 4 x 0 5 40 ms The averaged values are output every 40 ms POINT Count average processing requires at least two times of conversion processing excluding the maximum and the minimum values Set the setting time to four times or more 4 4 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 1 A D conversion methods 4 FUNCTION MELSEC TA eries c Moving average The digital output values imported per sampling period are averaged to find a gt value which is then stored into the buffer memory A A a Since average processing is made with data shifted per sampling the most recent Ela O digital output value is obtainable A D conversion value Sampling period Z 16000 z 9 ia 5 ao E 26 DO 8000 a gt 1st storage a z r i l gt 2nd storage b r r gt 3rd storage c S i 1 1 1 Ww i o 0 i l i T z W i j Time ms ee CH1
86. 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D e 2 5 2 1 Input signals ccoooooocoooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 5 2 5 2 2 Output SigNalSse eeeeceeceececcccecccccococcococecccoccccccccoccococcocccccccccccccccecoccococooooceccecceceeeeee D en 9 CHAPTER6 BUFFER MEMORY 6 1 to6 38 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 A 8 Buffer Memory Assignment eeesesesesesesesesececececcecoccecscscscscecsesecececesececececececocseossssssssseeG CH1 A D Conversion Enable Disable Setting Un GO eeeeeeeeseeeeesesesececececcesosoesessossssosssoe G 1 CH1 Averaging Process Method Setting Un G1 eeeeeeeseseeeseseseeeeesecececececcesosceoseseesssssssoe G 1 CH1 Averaging Process Time Number of Times Setting UN G2 sesesscscescecccscccccccsccsccsecees G 11 CH1 A D Conversion Scaling Enable Disable Setting UN G10 ssseseescescccescccccccccccccsccccosesees G 11 CH1 A D Conversion Scaling Lower Limit Value Un G11 and CH1 A D Conversion Scaling Upper Limit Value UN G12 eeeeceecccccccocoocococcccccccccccococcococcccecccccccccccccccoccococoococcceccoccoecocoooooo 6 e 12 CH1 Input Shifting Amount to Conversion Value UnN G13 e seeeeeeeeseeceeccecceceecoececoecoocooccoecoeoo G 13 CH1 Input Signal Error Detection Setting UN G20 seseessessesesesesesososesecocosoccococoso
87. 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 A 5 REVISIONS sesesesesesesescosoeococososeseoososeseocosoooeocososososososesesososeseoeosocoescesososososeseoesessosoessesesososoe A _ G INTRODUCTION esesesesesesesesoseseoeocososococososososososeseooooseoeococosococosososooeoosesescosososocesesosososeseseseo 7 CONTENTS seseseseseseseceosoeocococososocosesesoseseseseseoosooeocosososocesesesososesesesesoseseseosososocecesesesesssoseseoe _ 7 ABOUT MANUALS sesesseseeecesosososososesesosooooescosococococosososocosesesososesesescocoeseocosososocosesesosesoseseses A 12 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES eeseesesesesesesesececececeecccescocececesesesee A 12 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS sssseeesesesosesesooeococososocococosososososesesesososescososooseosesososos A 13 PACKING LIS Teeecccccoocooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 13 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 2 1 1 Features coooooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 8 2 1 Applicable SYSTEMS eeeeceecccccccccccccccccccscccsccccccccccscccocssccscocsoccsocscccsocscccsccccccsoccsoosooccooeces 2 1 2 2 Using the Q64AD2DA with Redundant CPU coooooooooooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 2 3 Checking Function Version Serial Number and Software Versi
88. 1 to Un G194 and Error time Un G1791 to Un G1794 on the basis of the CPU module time information If the error time is wrong check the time setting of the CPU module 2 When using network modules the error time may not be stored as follows When using the Q64AD2DA in the MELSECNET H remote I O network the time information is transferred as shown below Therefore the sequence of power supply for the system and the error timing may result in storing wrong information at the point of error occurrence e CPU module MELSECNET H master module MELSECNET H remote module Q64AD2DA Example The remote module is powered on firstly and the CPU module is powered on secondly Consequently an error occurs immediately after the remote module is powered on 11 1 Error Code List 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Error code list Errors are classified into two levels moderate module error and minor module warning When a moderate error occurs conversion processing is not performed When a minor error occurs conversion processing is performed with the settings that the system operated normally last time a Errors unrelated to channels Table 11 2 lists the error codes unrelated to channels If an error occurs the error code will be written to Latest error code Un G1790 Error code Corresponding decimal channel 4 Mode rate 4 Mode 2 rate AG el series Table 11 2 Errors unrelated to channe
89. 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 4 When digital output values cannot be read 11 6 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG TA eres 11 2 5 When A D conversion completed flag does not turn on during use in normal mode Table 11 9 When A D conversion completed flag does not turn on during use in normal mode 5 x Reference Check item Corrective action 4 section j Section Is an input signal error being generated Check CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 6 23 11 2 6 When an analog output value is not output Table 11 10 When an analog output value is not output Reference Check item Corrective action i section n Section Check that External power off flag X6 is set to on and Is 24VDC being supplied from the external power supply supply 24VDC external supply power to the external en power supply connector terminal 743 Is there any fault with the analog signal lines such as broken or Check for any abnormality on the signal lines by a visual CHAPTER disconnected line check and a continuity check 7 Is the CPU module in the STOP status Set the CPU module to the RUN status Check CH5 Setting range Un G912 in the monitor of GX Section 5 Developer 6 36 Is the output setting range correct bee ate If the output range setting is incorrect redo GX Developer Section intelligent function module Switch 2 setting 7 5 2 Check the on or off status of High resolution mode status Section
90. 1741 Maximum and minimum scaling values converted are stored For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 and Section 6 1 3 1 Stored data a Storage form Digital values are stored into the buffer memory in 16 bit signed binary form b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO CH1 Maximum scaling value Un G108 CH1 Minimum scaling value Un G110 Data part Sign bit 1 Negative value 0 Positive value Figure 6 7 Storage data of CH1 Maximum scaling value Un G108 and CH1 Minimum scaling value Un G110 b Updating cycle The updating cycle is the time for sampling processing number of channels to be used x 5004s 2 How to reset storage data To reset the storage data of all channels CH1 to CH4 perform any of the following operations Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to change the setting Set Maximum and minimum values reset request YD to on If the storage data is reset the maximum and minimum values measured after the reset will be stored for all the channels CH1 to CH4 6 23 6 20 CH1 Maximum Scaling Value Un G108 Un G1740 and CH1 Minimum Scaling Value Un G110 Un G1741 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC A caries 6 21 CH1 Setting Range Un G112 Analog input range settings in Switch 1 of Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box for each analog input channel can be checked For information
91. 222 paa E S E a E M232 es M242 M252 M262 M272 Y1009 M104 M282 p E a O S O S E a E S EE v KO M280 D21 a D22 D23 M282 M282 l Figure 9 24 Program example without using GX Configurator AD continued 9 33 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package MELSEC TA cries Sets D A conversion scaling function of CH6 Turns on Operating condition setting request Y1009 Turns off Operating condition setting request Y1009 Reads scaling values of CH1 to CH3 Q PROGRAMMING 4 Detecting an input signal error and processing the error detection a Processing CH3 input signal error detection X24 X1007 a Hf SET Y100F J 5 Setting default digital input values X21 X1000 i il f MOV K6000 D31 J mov K3000 D32 6 Writing digital input values X22 X1000 r RENTO J1 K3 K1 HO K802 D31 K1 M290 n REMTO J1 K4 Ki HO K1002 D32 K1 M300 M290 M291 y H 4 SET M292 J M300 M301 a a HT M302 J M292 M302 _ RST M292 RST M302 7 Setting enabling analog output X1000 1 j Y1005 J CY1006 5 8 Displaying error codes and resetting X25 X100F M312 ttt jH SET M2 Z REMFR J1 K5 K1 HO K1800 D3000 K200 M310 M310 M311 4 4 f Mov D3000 Z0 7 gt 20 KO BCD D1200Z0 K4Y30 J SET Y100F RST
92. 2767 limits will be fixed 1 CH1 Digital output value 36000 2 Scaling Velie oS ge Un G100 32767 TTE 4 CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value lt 20000 Un G13 i 16000 2 CH1 Scaling value Un G102 4000 16000 Figure 4 3 Scaling value for the case of exceeding the range from 32768 to 32767 resulted from shifting processing 4 10 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 4 Shifting function A D conversion 4 FUNCTION MELSEC A series 4 2 5 Input signal error detection function Input signal error detection function is the function that detects voltage or current input exceeding a setting range OVERVIEW 1 Overview a If the input voltage or current rises to or above the input signal error detection upper limit value or falls to or below the lower limit value an error occurs under the following operations e CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 is set to on 1 e Input signal error detection signal X7 is set to on e ALM LED blinks CONFIGURATION SYSTEM gt oO a When CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 is set to on 1 a digital output value immediately before the error detection is held for the channel In addition CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 is set to off 0 O w To set CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 and Input signal error detection
93. 3 1 CHAPTER Online module change Modules can be changed without the system being stopped 40 4 2 4 1 Function List 4 FUNCTION MELSEC IA series 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 1 A D conversion methods OVERVIEW 1 Sampling period of the Q64AD2DA A D conversion is performed from CH1 to CH4 and D A conversion is performed from CH5 to CH6 in series in 500xs per channel for the Q64AD2DA Sampling period is the period of renewing digital output values The period of renewing digital output values varies depending on the total number of channels enable A D conversion and D A conversion CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 Sampling processing A D conversion is made successively for analog input values and the converted digital output values are stored in buffer memory 3 Averaging processing Averaging processing requires at least two times of conversion processing excluding the maximum and the minimum values After the first averaging processing is completed A D conversion completed flag XE is set to on A SPECIFICATIONS a Time average A D conversion is made for the preset period of time and the sum of values excluding maximum and minimum values is averaged resulting in storing into the buffer memory The processing times within the set time varies depending on the number of channels used total number of channels enable A D conversion and D A conversion The processing times wi
94. 31 e CH1 Logging cycle unit setting Un G32 e CH1 Logging data setting Un G33 e CH1 Logging points after trigger Un G34 e CH1 Level trigger condition setting Un G35 e CH1 Trigger data Un G36 e CH1 Trigger setting value Un G37 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS S31 FUNCTION b If Operating condition setting completed flag X9 is set to off A D conversion processing will not performed ce as 22 96 iy r o c Under the following conditions Operating condition setting completed flag X9 will be set to off ae fe e When Operating condition setting request Y9 is set to on z Speer se gt Executed with the Q64AD2DA m gt Executed with sequence program E ON m Module ready X0 off l l on ON z Operating condition setting K E completion flag X9 OFF OFF a TOS ig t N ES r z ON beer i goo Operating condition setting Fi a lt We request Y9 OFF l OFF WO E x oon CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Conversion disabled Conversion enabled Un GO ON A D conversion completed s flag XE OFF Figure 5 6 Timing diagram of Operating condition setting completion flag X9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 6 5 2 1 Input signals D I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE MELSEC TA cries 7 Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag XD This flag will be set t
95. 4 702 37 237 437 637 Trigger setting value 0 Riw s 6 1 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC A eres Table 6 1 A D conversion area Un GO to Un G799 Address decimal Bee Description Default Read write 2 a to to to to System area 99 299 499 699 5 100 300 500 700 Md Digital output value 0 R 101 301 501 701 System area 102 302 502 702 Md Scaling value 0 R 103 303 503 703 System area 104 304 504 704 Md Maximum digital output value 0 R B 105 305 505 705 System area 2 106 306 506 706 Md Minimum digital output value 0 R fe 5 107 307 507 707 System area gt g 108 308 508 708 Md Maximum scaling value 0 R 109 309 509 709 System area 110 310 510 710 Md Minimum scaling value 0 R 111 311 511 711 System area g 112 312 512 712 Setting range 0 R 113 313 513 713 Md A D conversion completed flag 0 R Q A D 114 314 514 714 Input signal error detection flag 0 R O conversion 115 315 515 715 FR area to to to to System area 119 319 519 719 120 320 520 720 Oldest pointer 0 R 121 321 521 721 VE Latest pointer 0 R 122 322 522 722 Logging data points 0 R 123 323 523 723 Trigger pointer 0 R O 124 324 524 724 S to to to to System area T 189 389 589 789 190 390 590 790 Latest error code 0 R 191 391 591 791 er a nein digi ot 0 R
96. 4AD2DA analog input output module GX Developer Product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers GX Works2 GX Configurator AD Abbreviation for analog digital converter module setting and monitor tool GX Configurator AD SW2D5C QADU E GX Configurator DA Abbreviation for digital analog converter module setting and monitor tool GX Configurator DA SW2D5C QDAU E QCPU Q mode Generic term for the QOOJCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU Generic term for the QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU Personal computer IBM PC AT compatible personal computer Factory default setting Generic term for analog input ranges of 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA and for analog output ranges of 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA FB Abbreviation for function block Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Windows Vista
97. 4VDC external power supply Bs connector and FG terminal 1 For details check the error code Refer to Section 11 1 2 Signal names of terminal block f The following table shows the signal names of the terminal block 2 Table 7 3 Signal names of terminal block 2 5 Terminal Conversion i T Channel Signal name number type 1 V w 2 CH1 V l 5 a 3 I O 4 V 35 5 CH2 Vir OS 6 I O A D F 7 V 8 CH3 V l 9 I Sa T0 V 11 CH4 V l 4 12 i2 w 13 V E 14 CH5 COM a 15 I D A 7 16 V 17 CH6 COM 18 fa Z no mn x 5 ra Ww Q a x a GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 7 3 Part Names 7 4 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING 7 4 Wiring MELSEC TA cries The following explains the wiring precautions and module wiring examples 7 4 1 Wiring precautions To achieve a reliable system and fully utilize the functionality of the Q64AD2DA external wiring resistant to noise is required This section provides wiring precautions 1 2 3 4 7 4 Wiring Use separate cables for the AC control circuit and the external input signals of the Q64AD2DA to avoid the influence of the AC side surges and inductions Do not install external wiring cables together with the main circuit line a high voltage cable and a load cable from other than the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause the module more susceptible to noises surges an
98. 5PHCPU Redundant CPU iene 53 x O Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU 16 QOOUCPU Programmable Q01UCPU controller CPU QO02UCPU 36 QO03UDCPU QO04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Universal model QCPU Sea O O Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Number of modules High performance model QCPU 24 64 2 1 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M eL 26 fel ceries Table 2 1 Applicable modules number of mountable modules and applicable base units 2 2 Applicable CPU module CPU type CPU model Base unit 2 Number of modules ee Safety CPU QS001CPU Not applicable x x 3 QO06CCPU V C Controller module QO6CCPU V B 64 O O Q12DCCPU V O Applicable x Not applicable 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the CPU module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit 3 The safety CPU cannot be connected with extension base units Remark eeeeeeseeeoeaeeaeesceaeaeaeceaeneeeeeeeeeeaesea eae eeeaeseeaeeeaeeeee For the use of the C Controller module refer to C Controller Module User s Manual eeeeeeeseeeeeeoevoeseeoeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaseseeeeeseeeeeseeeoe eee ee 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 2 ed OVERVIEW z O amp o LL Z Q O SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNA
99. 7 5 2 2 Default The digital input value 0 is set for all the channels CH5 and CH6 in default configuration To perform D A conversion change the setting value POINT The digital input values for all the channels CH5 and CH6 will be 0 in the following case After the CPU module is powered on Module ready X0 is set to on e After the CPU module is reset Module ready X0 is set to on 6 31 6 30 CH5 Digital Input Value Un G802 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC A eres 6 31 CH5 D A Conversion Scaling Enable Disable Setting Un G810 Whether to enable or disable a scaling conversion of digital input values is set Refer to gt Section 4 3 4 u For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 1 Setting method z O a Set whether to enable or disable the D A conversion scaling by using the buffer z memory a 9 nz Table 6 24 CH5 D A conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G810 D 8 0 D A conversion scaling enabled o D A conversion scaling 1 z disabled O i b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to g Section 5 2 2 3 2 2 Default The D A conversion scaling is disabled 1 for all the channels CH5 and CH6 in default configuration Z 5 zZ mi v H 2a ae Yi QE ez gt a ie Ww a W E ma aa PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator A
100. 802 are stored into the buffer memory in 16 bit signed binary form 6 36 CH5 Setting Range Un G912 Analog output range settings in Switch 2 of the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box for each analog output channel can be checked For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 1 Stored data Table 6 26 Storage data of CH5 Setting range Un G912 OH 4 to 20mA 1H 0 to 20mA 2H 1 to 5V Co wa T ooa 4H 10 to 10V EJPOINT The setting range cannot be changed by using CH5 Setting range Un G912 Change the setting range in the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Refer to Section 7 5 2 6 37 CH5 HOLD CLEAR Function Setting Un G913 Analog output HOLD CLEAR function settings in Switch 3 of the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box for each analog output channel can be checked For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 1 Stored data Table 6 27 Storage data of CH5 HOLD CLEAR function setting Un G913 Setting value Analog output range OH CLEAR TH HOLD EJPOINT The analog output HOLD CLEAR function setting cannot be changed by using CH5 HOLD CLEAR function setting Un G913 Change the HOLD CLEAR function setting in the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Refer to Section 7 5 2 6 35 6 35 CH5 Real Conversion Digit
101. 9 or less 288 3H 0 to 5V 16384 to 16383 4096 to 4095 4096 or more 4095 16384 or more 16383 4H 10 to 10V Real range Real range 4000 to 4000 4097 or less 4096 16385 or less 16384 16000 to 16000 2 Setting methods a Set the quantity to be shifted by using CH5 Shifting amount to input value Un G813 b Shifting quantities are added to the digital input value set with CH5 Digital input value Un G802 every conversion period c The default of the shifting amount to input value is 0 d If a value is written to a shifting amount to input value regardless of whether Operating condition setting request Y9 is set to on or off the shifting amount to input value will be added to digital input value 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion 4 31 4 3 5 Shifting function D A conversion OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM A SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 3 Setting example For the channel in setting the output range to 0 to 20mA and the high resolution mode to 0 to 4000 I O characteristic is adjusted as shown below Analog output value Input value shift amount lt gt aS SaaS ae R N 1 After F 4 adjustment H a 20 0 3980 4000 Digital input value gt Input value shift amoun
102. Analog Input Output Module MITSUBISHI Q64AD2DA GX Configurator AD SW2D5C QADU E GX Configurator DA SW2D5C QDAU E Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG Q SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and JN CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage w m ee oe Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions WARNING Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area of the buffer memory in the intelligent func
103. Base Module MasterPLC gt Main base Powe UnmojUnmoj rsu unti funti pply Al6pijng ng QOBPHCPU Parameter status vo Address o 10 C System monitor 0 1 Online module change Powe Intelli None rsu QOBPHCPU gent pply 16pt 16pt r Status amp Module system error Module error oO Module warning 3 Hi Module change monit Close Figure 10 13 System Monitor dialog box 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 1 0 10 10 3 2 When the initial setting has been configured with sequence program 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEG TA eres b Click the button to enable the online module change Online module change Operation Target module 1 0 address 000H Module change execution z Module name Q64AD2DA Installation confirmation Module control restart a Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Execution Cancel Figure 10 14 Online module change module change execution dialog box If the following error dialog box appears click the button remove the module and mount a new module MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Figure 10 15 Error dialog box c After checking that the
104. CIFICATIONS 3 1 Performance Specifications The following table shows the performance specifications of the Q64AD2DA Table 3 1 Performance specifications of the Q64AD2DA 1 2 Item Specifications Number of analog input j 4 points 4 channels points Analog Voltage 10 to 10VDC Input resistance 1M input Current 0 to 20mADC Input resistance 2502 Normal resolution mode 96 to 4095 4096 to 4095 1096 to 4595 Digital output i High resolution mode 384 to 16383 288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 3288 to 13787 dala Normal resolution mode High resolution mode g Digital output Maximum Digital output Maximum input range value resolution value resolution 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV ee ee I O characteristics and a 2 Aall sgam 5 10 to 10V 4000 to 4000 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV maximum resolution gt 1 to 5V 1000 to 4500 1 0mV 3000 to 13500 0 333mV Extended mode 0 to 20mA 54A 1 66 4A 5 4to20mA 0 104000 44A ci 1 33 uA A D 5 4 to 20mA oO 1000 to 4500 44A 3000 to 13500 1 33 UA conversion area Extended mode Analog 3 7 7 mal resolution mode High resolution mode input range Ambient 0 to 55 C 25 5 C 0 to 55 C 25 5 C temperature 0 to 10V 0 4 0 1 Accuracy Accuracy A 10 to 10V 64digit 16digit D 0 to 5V relative to maximum g Ae oS 1 to 5V digital ou
105. Click the button z For details refer to Section 8 7 POINT z The FB Support Parameter tab opens when a project being edited is a label z project 3 zE 68 2 Command buttons Common to the Intelligent function module parameter tab and the FB Support D Parameter tab Deletes the initial setting and auto refresh setting configured to the S selected module O Q If both the initial setting and auto refresh setting have been set but w either an Initial setting cell or Auto refresh cell is selected and this button is clicked only the setting of the selected cell is deleted Exits Intelligent function module utility 5 O When the FB Support Parameter tab is activated 5 Moves the settings in the selected line to the line in the same position in the Intelligent function module parameter tab W a When the Intelligent function module parameter tab is activated 23 n FB parameter gt gt Moves the settings in the selected line to the line in the same BS position in the FB Support Parameter tab So QE amp O W i T a a A et foo Roe GOE fae e e x 9 la t S e f g E Q x W ZSF Ed S55 a2s tes S D IE E Q FEAS 8 3 Operating the Utility Package 8 12 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function module utility 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEC TA cries 3 Menu bar a File menu Intelligent function module parameters
106. D GX Configurator DA 6 31 CH5 D A Conversion Scaling Enable Disable Setting Un G810 6 32 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 32 CH5 D A Conversion Scaling Lower Limit Value Un G811 and CH5 D A Conversion Scaling Upper Limit Value Un G812 A scaling range of converted digital input values is set Refer to Section 4 3 4 For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 1 Setting method a Set an D A scaling conversion range by using the buffer memory e Settable range 32000 to 32000 b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default The value 0 is set for all the channels CH5 and CH6 in default configuration When using a scaling function D A conversion change the setting value E POINT When using a scaling function D A conversion check that the D A conversion scaling using CH5 D A conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G810 is made valid 0 If the D A conversion scaling is set to be invalid 1 scaling upper and lower limit values will be ignored 6 33 CH5 Shifting Amount to Input Value Un G813 A quantity to be shifted using the shifting function D A conversion is set Refer to Section 4 3 5 For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 1 Setting method a Set a quantity to be shifted by using the buffer memory e Settable range 32768 to 32767 b
107. D20 x lt Koj WOA KO 7 mov WOA D20 u Zz 2 WOB KO Treenea MOV WOB D20 l j woc KO 7 Mov WoC D20 gt WoD Ko H o O D20 J WOE KO mov WOE D20 1 020 KO BCD D20 K4Y30 piel error codes for nasa Y100F X100F X1007 RST Y100F J rele IDE END Figure 9 21 Program example using GX Configurator AD 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 26 9 3 2 Program example using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package 1 Device list Table 9 12 Device list Device Function D21 CH1 Scaling read value D22 CH2 Scaling read value D23 CH3 Scaling read value D31 CH5 Initial digital input value D32 CH6 Initial digital input value Zo Device used for obtaining the latest address of error history X20 Device turned on by user to start reading a scaling value X21 Device turned on by user to set initial digital input value X22 Device turned on by user to write digital input value QX10 X20 to X2F X23 Device turned on by user to enable analog outputs of all channels X24 Device turned on by user to reset input signal error detection X25 Device turned on by user to reset an error Y30 to Y3F Error code display 4 digits in BCD QY10 Y30 to Y3F X1000 Module ready X1007 Input signal error detection signal X1009 Operating condition setting request X100F Error flag i Q64AD2DA X Y1000
108. During Online Module Change 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M eLS AG lA eries 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change This section explains the procedures of online module change when an initial setting of GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA is configured and when the initial setting is not configured oO PROGRAMMING 1 Table 10 2 Procedures of online module change Initial setting Reference GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA Section 10 3 1 5 Sequence program Section 10 3 2 Ww O W oO Zz T O 10 3 1 When the initial setting has been configured with GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA 1 Disabling conversion a Set CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO or CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 to Disable 1 and turn off and then on Operating condition setting request Y9 to stop conversion After checking that the conversion has stopped with CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 or the actual analog output value turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 TROUBLESHOOTING Device test Bit device Device Close E z APPENDIX Hide history FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force Word device buffer memory C Device Butfer memory Module stat 0 0 Hex Address 1000 pec Setting value 1 DEC zj 16 bit integer INDEX Program Label reference program ha Executio
109. E l EF Figure 2 3 Description on the front part of module aan UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 2 3 Checking Function Version Serial Number and Software Version 2 6 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TA cries c Checking on the System monitor dialog box Product Information List To display the system monitor select Diagnostics System monitor and click the Product Information List button of GX Developer Function version Serial No Product No Product Information List 0 0 Intelli Q QE4ADZDA l pt 0000 110310000000000 c o 1 None 0 2 None sE Figure 2 4 Checking the serial number and function version EJPOINT The serial number displayed on the Product information list dialog box of GX Developer may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front of the module e The serial number on the rating plate and front part of the module indicates the management information of the product The serial number displayed on the Product information list dialog box of GX Developer indicates the function information of the product The function information of the product is updated when a new function is added 2 3 Checking Function Version Serial Number and Software Version SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Fl cries 2 Checking the software version of GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA To check the software version of GX Configurator AD a
110. EM Example The remote module is powered on firstly and the CPU module is powered on secondly Consequently an error occurs immediately after the remote module is powered on SPECIFICATIONS 6 29 CH5 D A Conversion Enable Disable Setting Un G800 Whether to enable or disable D A conversion is set For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 FUNCTION 1 Setting method a Set D A conversion enable disable setting by using the buffer memory Table 6 22 Setting range of CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 Setting value Description 0 D A conversion enabled 1 D A conversion disabled b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE 6 amp O 2 Default D A conversion is set to be disabled 1 for all the channels CH5 and CH6 in default th configuration gt POINT o Design the system so that the D A conversion is enabled 0 by using CH5 D A Le conversion enable disable setting Un G800 after the external power Refer to ow Section 7 3 is supplied Analog output may not be performed properly if the ZRS external power is not at the specified voltage gok TEH UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 6 29 CH5 D A Conversion Enable Disable Setting Un G800 6 30 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 30 CH5 Digital Input
111. H to FH set 1H for example 2 The mode setting is reflected to all channels both A D and D A conversions 3 When the setting is completed click the button 7 15 7 5 Setting from GX Developer 7 5 2 Intelligent function module switch setting PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC IA series 7 6 Offset Gain Correction The offset gain can be corrected using the scaling function and shift function The offset gain correction examples are shown on the following pages OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE me BUFFER MEMORY fm Zz T ao w gt a Ww QO O a 0 Z w N UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 7 6 Offset Gain Correction 7 16 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING M ELSEG Q series 1 A D conversion Example When executing offset gain correction under the following condition Analog input Analog input n Scaling value Scaling value AID conversion 28e AID conversion Value example before OmA 3 example after OmA 0 correction correction 20mA 4008 20mA 4000 A D conversion Setting range 0 to ADA z lt 4000 4000 gt Offset gain correction Shift Scaling y Set Enable for Conversion enable disable setting Un GO of the offset gain correction target channel y Set OmA used a
112. If a quantity to be shifted is set the value set as a digital output value using CH5 Digital input value Un G802 will be added regardless of whether to set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on or off 2 Default The value 0 is set for all the channels CH5 and CH6 in default configuration 6 33 6 32 CH5 D A Conversion Scaling Lower Limit Value Un G811 and CH5 D A Conversion Scaling Upper Limit Value Un G812 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC Aeres 6 34 CH5 Set Value Check Code Un G900 Un G1764 Whether digital values outside the settable range are set by using CH5 Digital input value Un G802 can be checked For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 and Section 6 1 3 OVERVIEW 1 Stored data a When a digital input value outside the settable range Refer to Section 6 30 is set by using CH5 Digital input value Un G802 one of the check codes listed in Table 6 25 is stored CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Table 6 25 Check code list Check code Description OOOFH A digital input value exceeding the settable range is set OOFOH A digital input value that falls short of the settable range is set A digital input value that either falls short or exceeds the settable range was set OOFFH For example the OOFFH check code is stored if a digital input value exceeding the valid SPECIFICATIONS range is set and then without the check code being reset a digital input v
113. LS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEG lA sries b When mounted with MELSECNET H remote I O station The table below shows the network modules and base units applicable to the Q64AD2DA and the number of network modules to be mounted Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Table 2 2 Applicable modules number of mountable modules and applicable base units Base unit Applicable network module mod jes remote I O station remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72LP25GE QJ72BR15 Number of 64 O Applicable x Not applicable 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the network module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit Remark Sooo ooo coo occ ooo The Basic model QCPU or C Controller module cannot create the MELSECNET H remote I O network eseeeeeeseeeoeeeoeaoeeeaeaeeseceaoeseeeeeseeoeaceoe ee ee eee ee eeeeeaeeaee eee 6 2 Support of multiple CPU system When using the Q64AD2DA in a multiple CPU system refer to the following manual first e QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System a S
114. LSEG TA eres 10 3 2 When the initial setting has been configured with sequence program 1 Disabling conversion oO PROGRAMMING a Set CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO or CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 to Disable 1 and turn off and then on Operating condition setting request Y9 to stop conversion After checking that the conversion has stopped with CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 or the actual analog output value turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 1 Ww a ia O Ww O W 0 Zz lt O Device test Bit device Device oO E El Z O FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force 2 N W Word device buffer memory a 3 C Devi ET evice Z Buffer memory Module start 1 0 o z Hex Address 1000 DEC x Setting value 1 DEC 16 bit integer Program Label reference program x A Execution history Zz W Device Setting condition ee Force OFF x Force ON Module start 0 Address 1000 D 1 Module start 0 Address 800 D 1 Module stark N Address RAND 1 lt T Figure 10 12 Device test dialog box 2 Removing a module a zZ a After choosing Online module change Mode in the dialog box opened by selecting Diagnostics gt Online module change of GX Developer double click a module to be changed online to display the Online module change dialog box System Monitor r Installed status Base 7 2
115. Lo lee ee eed 13500 SSS Ss ee eel hme Sis Sa soa l 1 High resolution mode i Normal resolution 1 mode i Analog input current mA Practical analog input range 04 22 Analog input current mA Analog input current mA Figure 3 3 Current input characteristic 3 2 I O Conversion Characteristic 3 2 1 I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion 3 SPECIFICATIONS M als AG lA orie EIPOINT 1 Set each input range within the practical analog input range and digital output range If these ranges are exceeded the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the performance specifications Avoid using the dotted line area shown in Figure 3 3 OVERVIEW 2 Do not input an analog input current of 30 mA or more The input elements may be damaged 3 If an analog value that exceeds the range of the digital output value is entered the digital output value will be fixed at the maximum or minimum value CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 Table 3 4 Digital output values in the case of an analog value exceeding the range 7 for the digital output value being entered 5 Digital output value Digital output value S Analog input range A e iL A normal resolution mode high resolution mode O setting m Ca 4 to 20mA 96 4095 288 12287 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA 1096 4595 3288 13787 Extended mode z O o Zz 5 w v H T 2 Z gt
116. MMING MELSEG ores 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network This section explains program examples using the following system configuration and conditions 1 System configuration Remote master station Remote I O station Station No 0 Station No 1 m QJ71LP 21 25 X YO to XY1F QX10 X20 to X2F QY10 Y30 to Y3F Q64AD2DA X Y 1000 to X Y100F QJ72LP25 25 Network No 1 Figure 9 16 System configuration example 2 Conditions of the intelligent function module switch setting a A D conversion Table 9 9 Conditions of the intelligent function module switch setting Channel Input range setting Resolution setting CH1 4 to 20mA CH2 High resolution mode CH3 1 to 5V CH4 Not used b D A conversion Table 9 10 Conditions of the intelligent function module switch setting Setting of the analog Output range setting output HOLD CLEAR Resolution setting function CH5 4 to 20mA CLEAR High resolution mode CH6 1 to 5V HOLD 9 19 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network Q PROGRAMMING M als AG lA oris 3 Programming conditions a Used channels A D conversion CH1 to CH3 D A conversion CH5 and CH6 CH4 is not used in the program examples PROGRAMMING b Use the following A D conversion methods for each channel aI CH1 Sampling processing O e CH2 Count average 50 times YO CH3 Moving average 10 times 3 OO c Use the following functions for eac
117. ND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 6 14 CH1 Level Trigger Condition Setting Un G35 6 18 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC TA eries 6 15 CH1 Trigger Data Un G36 An address of buffer memory monitoring a level trigger for the occurrence is set during the logging facility use Refer to Section 4 2 7 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set an address of buffer memory storing data to be monitored by using the buffer memory e Settable range O to 1999 b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default Table 6 17 Default of CH1 Trigger data Un G36 Corresponding buffer Channel Description memory CH1 102 CH2 302 Scaling value CH3 502 CH4 702 POINT Set adequate monitoring data such as digital output values scaling values and level data for trigger data The other data settings do not guarantee the normal operation of the Q64AD2DA Example Setting area Pr System area 6 16 CH1 Trigger Setting Value Un G37 6 19 A value that makes level triggers work is set during the logging facility use Refer to Section 4 2 7 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set a value that makes level triggers work by using the buffer memor
118. OS Yi QE amp O rm f2 wi mE uw gt m Q A Zo 6 w or 42 vao RoE GOE X u aan x 9 Be a 558 3 2 I O Conversion Characteristic 3 8 3 2 1 I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA cries 3 2 2 I O conversion characteristic of D A conversion The I O conversion characteristic of D A conversion represents the angle formed by a straight line connecting the offset value and gain value when converting the digital input value written from the CPU module to an analog output value voltage or current output Offset value The offset value refers to the analog output value voltage or current when the digital input value set from the CPU module is 0 Gain value The gain value is the analog output value voltage or current when the digital input value set from the CPU module is e 4000 in normal resolution mode e 12000 when 1 to 5V 0 to 5V 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA selected in high resolution mode e 16000 when 10 to 10V is selected in high resolution mode 3 2 I O Conversion Characteristic 3 2 2 I O conversion characteristic of D A conversion M als e6 aries 3 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Voltage output characteristic MaIAYSAO NOLLVYNODIANOD Fee SINCE ODE OE 1 NOILONN 4 JINON Nd AHL AMOWAW Y344N9 a EO T a es WALSAS H04 STVNOIS O I XO AV JOINOYUOD X AYOLVYVdsaYd ASVMOVd ALILA
119. Onee seeeeeeeeeeeeeseescscoscooooeooeoesee 2 G CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 11 3 1 Performance SPECifications ceeeceeeccccccccccccscccsscoccsccccscccsscccsscocssoocscvosscooccococcssoccssosccooces 3 1 3 2 1 0 Conversion Characteristic cooooooooooo0o0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 m 4 3 2 1 I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion eseececeeeeoeooo000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 4 3 2 2 I O conversion characteristic of D A conversion sesesseceeeecoocooo0000000000000000000000000000000000 3 Q CHAPTER4 FUNCTION 4 1to4 33 4 1 Function List cooocooooooooooooooooooo0o0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion e seesessesseeseesessecsecoescecocsoesocccsecoesoesocsoecoesocsoesecsoesossse 4 3 4 2 1 AID conversion methods seseeseesseseeseeseseossecoecooscseccsecoesoosoeccsocoesoosoesoccoesocsoesoesoesossoe 4 3 4 2 2 Maximum and minimum values hold function sessessssseseeseesesseccecsoseocsecoesoesoccocsocsoeseese G 4 2 3 Scaling function A D CONVeErSIOn s seseseseseeeeeeeeeeseceeecceocosoeosesosssosccoscsssessscscssecesesesee4 G 4 2 4 Shifting function A D Conversion seseeeeeeeeseesesesesesesececeseseseseceoeocococececosececososossssssses 4 9 4 2 5 Input signal error detection FUNCTION eeeeeeeeeeesesssesesesesecesececececeseseceoeococecesesosoessosssos 4 1 4 2 6 Input r
120. Q series 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting Purpose gt Set buffer memory of the Q64AD2DA to be auto refreshed 3 Operating procedure Input Start I O No gt Select Module type gt Select Module model name z Click the Auto refresh button z 1 Input a start I O number in hexadecimal a 3 Setting window 29 Auto refresh setting Module information 2 Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 2 Module model name Q644D2D4 3 m 7 S Setting item Mouse ee Tranter a A D conversion area CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value CH2 Shifting amount to conversion value CH3 Shifting amount to conversion value CH4 Shifting amount to conversion value CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value Zz CH3 Digital output value 2 CH4 Digital output value 2 CHT Scaling value T Make text file End setup W gs Figure 8 8 Auto refresh setting window F a Description S 9 SE 1 Display items Module side Buffer Displays the transferable buffer memory size of the setting a size item fixed at one word 5 Module size Transfer Displays the number of words that are transferred starting word count from a device set at PLC side Device fixed at one word th Ww Transfer direction indicates that data are written from the device to the a buffer memory gt indicates that data are read from the buffer memory to 9 the device gt z W PLC side Device Input a CPU module device to be auto refreshed ES Usable d
121. R function setting to all channels Refer to Table 4 12 Table 4 12 Analog output HOLD CLEAR function of MELSECNET H remote I O station HOLD CLEAR function setting Hold Clear of analog output value Error time output mode Same setting to all channels Hold analog output Clear analog output Output offset value CLEAR For the station unit block guarantee of the cyclic data refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion 4 3 2 Analog output HOLD CLEAR function 4 FUNCTION MELSEC Aeres 4 3 3 Analog output test during a CPU module STOP While the CPU module is in stop status an analog output test as shown can be performed Refer to Table 4 13 OVERVIEW 1 Operating method To conduct an analog output test perform the following on Device test of GX Developer on the relevant test screens of Configurator AD or Configurator DA Refer to Section 8 6 1 The operating procedure is as follows 1 Set CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 to be tested to be enabled 1 2 Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on 3 Set CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 to be tested to be enabled to on 4 Set digital input values equivalent to analog values that are to be output to CH5 Digital input value Un G802 Table 4 13 List of analog output test CONFIGURATION SY
122. RATION SYSTEM f gt SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 4 POINT 1 If CH1 Logging hold request Y1 is set to off before CH1 Logging hold flag is set to on logging will restart without hold after logging of data that set for logging points after trigger will start 2 From when CH1 Logging hold request Y1 is set to on until when a hold trigger occurs in the Q64AD2DA the delay is up to the time calculated as shown below e Trigger occurrence delay Number of channels that conversion is enabled x 500s Scan time for CPU modules 5 Referring to logging data without logging hold Logging data can be checked without logging hold a Buffer memory to be used Table 4 9 Buffer memory required for referring to logging data on Reference Item Description i Section n The address of the buffer memory that store the oldest data Oldest pointer Section 6 24 can be checked in the logging data storage area The address of the buffer memory that store the latest data can Latest pointer Section 6 25 be checked in the logging data storage area i 3 The number of data stored in the logging data storage area can Logging data points Section 6 26 be checked b Precautions To refer to logging data during data logging
123. ROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres Auto refresh setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No Module model name Q644D2D4 Module side Transfer word count Transfer PLC side direction Device Module side Setting item Buffer size A D conversion area CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value CA Stal out CH1 Scaling value CH2 Scaling value CH3 Scaling value 4 Scaling value lue vj yj al CH24 D conversion completed flag CH3 A D conversion completed flag CH3 Input signal error detection flag w7 1 1 CH4 Input signal error detection flag a 1 1 D A conversion area w80 CH5 Digital input value CHE Digital input value al 1 lt w81 Shifting amount 1 d cor digital value 1 gt Common area 7 1 gt w8 CH1 Error code CH2 Error code 1 gt Jw9 CH3 Error code 1 gt wia CH4 Error code u gt WwOB CH5 Error code 1 a fl gt 1 ite CHE Error code Latest error code in common area Make text file End setup Cancel Figure 9 20 Auto refresh setting window c Writing intelligent function module parameters Refer to Section 8 3 3 Write the intelligent function module parameters to the remote I O station Configure the setting in the window for selecting a target intelligent function module 4 POINT To write the intelligent function module parameters set a target remote I O station in the screen
124. SH 14000 e CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value Un G11 SL 2000 b Input value Digital output value Dx 7500 7500 x 14000 2000 14000 2000 16000 16000 2 Scaling value 10812 5 10813 Fractional portion is rounded off 4 8 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 3 Scaling function A D conversion 4 FUNCTION MELSEC A series 4 2 4 Shifting function A D conversion The shifting function adds a setting quantity to a digital output value shifting a digital a output value and stores the value into buffer memory i O 1 Overview a The shifted output values are stored into CH1 Scaling value Un G102 5 b The shifting amount to conversion value can be set within the range from 32768 to 32767 ae Yn O c Changing the shifting amount to conversion value reflects the scaling value in real 29 time Therefore the digital output value can be adjusted with the shifting function when the CPU is powered on F Zz d If a scaling function for A D conversion is used simultaneously the value that is e made scaling processing will be shifted 2 2 Setting methods a Set the quantity to be shifted by using CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value Un G13 b Shifting quantities are added to the digital output value set with CH1 Digital output value Un G100 every sampling period and then the added value is stored into CH1 Scaling value Un G102
125. STEM A SPECIFICATIONS CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 Analog output test Allowed Not allowed Not allowed Setting Enable Disable combination 1 Perform the analog output test after changing CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 to be enabled 1 FUNCTION 2 Operating timing While the CPU module is in stop status the relationship between CH5 Output enable y eo disable flag Y5 and the analog output value are shown below T6 D A conversion output is executed even when the programmable controller CPU stops 5 2 D wy QE Programmable controller CPU status z Q CH5 Output Ss enable disable ca flag Y5 Hie gt a Analog output Analog output values Analog output values Analog output values value status resulted from D A conversion orsstvalue resulted from D A conversiony N Offset value Nresulted from D A conversion Q A Figure 4 15 Analog output value during the stop status of the CPU module Zo Or 42 Table 4 14 Details of the analog output value during the stop status of the CPU module 2 amp 2 Be S j Number Description oe E 1 CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 is set to off She 2 When CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 is set to on forcibly the offset value of the analog output value changes to the analog output value that D A conversion is performed we To tag a E E88 JE 586 4 3 Function Detail
126. U or later to change a module on the remote I O z station online 4 Base unit a When the slim type main base unit Q3 O SB is used a module cannot be changed online z Zz b When the extension base unit type requiring no power supply module Q50 B a n P lt is used modules on the base units connected to the extension base unit cannot be changed online The online module change is supported by the Q64AD2DA of the first product to S the function version C A eeeeeeaeveveeeeaeeoeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeseeseeeeneaeneeaee eee ed 10 1 Execution Condition of Online Module Change 1 0 2 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M ELSEG Q series 10 2 Operations During Online Module Change The following table shows operations during online module change Table 10 1 Operations during online module change CPU operation O Performed x Not performed FROM TO Operation of intelligent function Dedicated Initial User operation instruction setting parameter instructions module 1 Disabling conversion Turn off all Y signals that have been turned on by a sequence Module operates normally Oo O O Oo x oO program y y 2 Removing a module Module stops operation Start an online module change RUN LED is off operation using GX Developer Conversion is disabled Y Click the Execution button on the dialog box to enable a module replacement
127. Value Un G802 Digital input values are written from the CPU module as 16 bit signed binary code to perform D A conversion For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 1 Setting method Set digital input values to be D A converted to the buffer memory The settable range depends on the output range setting or resolution setting Refer to the settable ranges in Table 6 23 Table 6 23 Settable range corresponding to the output ranges and processing of digital values exceeding settable range Normal resolution mode 2 High resolution mode Output range Processing for the case of Processing for the case of setting Settable range written digital input Settable range written digital input 3 Real range values exceeding settable Real range values exceeding settable range range OH 4 to 20mA 1H 0 to 20mA 96 to 4095 4096 or more 4095 288 to 12287 12288 or more 12287 2H 1 to 5V real range 0 to 4000 97 or less 96 real range 0 to 12000 289 or less 288 3H 0 to 5V 16384 to 16383 4096 to 4095 4096 or more 4095 16384 or more 16383 4u 10 to 10V real range real range 4000 to 4000 4097 or less 4096 16385 or less 16384 16000 to 16000 1 Set in Switch 2 of Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Refer to Section 7 5 2 2 Set in Switch 4 of Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Refer to Section
128. a conversion setting is enabled for each channel and Operating condition setting request Y9 is set to on or off A D conversion or D A conversion will not be performed 2 The analog output values will be OmA or OV regardless of the other settings 3 Digital input value out of range error error code 1003 will not be detected 4 The value 0 not used or first A D conversion completed will be stored into CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 CH1 to CH4 5 In such a case the digital output values and scaling values converted immediately before External power off flag X6 is set to on will be retained The external power supply will cause the following processing 1 A D conversion and D A conversion will restart 2 After the restart the value 1 first A D conversion completed will be stored into CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 for the channels CH1 to CH4 again To set External power off flag X6 to off the following procedure must be conducted 1 Set Error clear request YF to on 2 After checking that External power off flag X6 is set to off set Error clear request YF to off The external power supply must be satisfied with the request of the performance specifications Refer to Table 3 1 If not External power off flag X6 may be set to on When the external power supply is turned on after the CPU module is powered on the timing diagram is as follows Fassia gt Executed w
129. a from sequence programs is disabled Doing so may cause malfunction 1 A D conversion area Un GO to Un G799 Table 6 1 A D conversion area Un GO to Un G799 Address decimal Description Default Read write 2 0 200 400 600 A D conversion enable disable setting 1 RIw s 1 201 401 601 Pr Averaging process method setting 0 RIw s 202 402 602 Averaging process time number of times setting 4 R W 3 203 403 603 to to to to System area 9 209 409 609 10 210 410 610 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting 1 R W 3 11 211 411 611 A D conversion scaling lower limit value 0 Riw 3 12 212 412 612 a A D conversion scaling upper limit value 0 RIW S 13 213 413 613 Shifting amount to conversion value 0 R W 3 14 214 414 614 to to to to System area 19 219 419 619 A D 20 220 420 620 Input signal error detection setting 0 RIw s conversion 21 221 421 621 G Input signal error detection setting value 0 RIW 3 aie 22 222 422 622 to to to to System area 29 229 429 629 30 230 430 630 Logging enable disable setting 1 RIw s 31 231 431 631 Logging cycle setting value 3000 R W 3 32 232 432 632 Logging cycle unit setting 0 RIw s 33 233 433 633 Logging data setting 1 Riw s 34 234 434 634 Logging points after trigger 5000 RIW S 35 235 435 635 PE Level trigger condition setting 0 R W 3 CH1 102 36 236 436 636 Trigger data Sm ie RIW 3 CH
130. al Value Un G902 Un G1774 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G Kel series 6 38 Level Data Un G1600 to Un G1609 Level data are used as monitoring data making level triggers work when using level gt triggers of logging facility The level data monitor devices specified for CPU modules or the u like excluding the buffer memory area of the Q64AD2DA to cause occurrence of triggers Refer to Section 6 15 Table 6 28 Buffer memory address where level data are stored 3 Level data 0 Un G1600 33 Level data 1 Un G1601 ro Level data 2 Un G 1602 a8 Level data 3 Un G1603 Level data 4 Un G1604 Level data 5 Un G1605 a Level data 6 Un G1606 Level data 7 Un G1607 z Level data 8 Un G1608 z Level data 9 Un G1609 m N 1 Example of use Write the adequate value of the buffer memory address storing level data to CH1 Trigger data Un G36 Example How to use level data S To monitor the data register D100 in CPU modules and make the level trigger of the m channel 1 work configure a sequence program as shown below a Write 1600 level data 0 to CH1 Trigger data Un G36 For the use of the level al data 0 2a ae b Transfer the stored data of D100 to the level data 0 Un G1600 if necessary as n Qf ez x0 Y9 x9 UO pe Jt O 61600 1 This program is configured when the start I O number is set to 0 Figure 6 11 How to use level data gt a ie WW x W E m
131. aling upper limit value Un G12 E e Setting a value corresponding to the lower limit of digital output as the o scaling lower limit value set with CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit Eg value Un G11 as 1 Input range from 10 to 10V normal resolution 4000 2 Input range from 10 to 10V normal resolution 4000 2 Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on z amp O i D D 4 FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 7 4 2 3 Scaling function A D conversion 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 3 How to calculate a scaling value 1 Input range 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA D x x SH SL Sy Dax 2 Input range 10 to 10V Scaling value Dx x SH SL p SH SL Dmax DMin 2 Scaling value Dx CH1 Digital output value Un G100 DMax The maximum digital output value in the input range being used DMin The minimum digital output value in the input range being used SH CH1 A D conversion scaling upper limit value Un G12 SL CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value Un G11 Setting example Using the scaling function A D conversion in input range from 10 to 10V and high resolution mode from 16000 to 16000 a Setting value e CH1 A D conversion scaling upper limit value Un G12
132. alue when the analog signals voltage or current input from outside the programmable controller are converted to digital 5 values z E o fa ae Offset value DE nO The offset value refers to the analog input value voltage or current that makes the digital output value be 0 25 Gain value The gain value refers to the analog input value voltage or current that makes the digital output value be e 4000 in normal resolution mode e 16000 or 12000 in high resolution mode A Z O q O a O r a A FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 3 2 I O Conversion Characteristic 3 4 3 2 1 I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion 3 SPECIFICATIONS Digital output value Digital output value Digital output value 3 5 1 1 to 5V 3 10 to 10V 16383 16000 4095 4000 4000 4096 16000 16384 5 1 to 5V Extended mode 13787 13500 4595 4500 0 1000 1096 3000 3288 1 Voltage input characteristic MELSEC TA cries Figure 3 2 shows voltage input characteristics Practical analog input range f i High resolution I 1 mode 1 1 Normal resolution mode Analog input voltage V Practical analog input range Normal resolution mode 10 0 10 Analog input voltage V Practical analog input r
133. alue of input range offset value 4 0mA e Gain value 20 0mA 40 24 Input signal error x 1000 detection setting value 20 0 40 100 10 0 Therefore use 100 10 0 for the setting of CH1 Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 4 14 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 5 Input signal error detection function 4 FUNCTION MELSEC IA series b Set CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 in the lower detection 2 f In this case the value for CH1 Input signal error detection operates as below z a gt iaputsianal detecti oy An error is detected while Upper 2 a CESR and lower detection 1 is set upper limit value 2 y X 21 6mA 1 6mA z 10 0 of 1 6mA E Offset value i 20m o fa fae nz Q 16mA ae Gain value Offset value Gain value 4mA_ a ee O 1 6mA z 10 0 of 1 6mA 2 4mA _ _ _ _ _ Q Input signal error detection ee lower limit value 4 Figure 4 5 Setting example of Input signal error detection function Zz O When CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 is set in the upper and lower S detection 1 an error will be detected in 21 6mA not only 2 4mA by the setting of 100 T 10 0 v 2a as Yi QE amp O W i i a Q Z ES vao RoE misim KED UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 2 Function
134. alue that falls short of the settable range is set b When a digital input value outside the settable range is set an error code 11003 is stored into CH5 Latest error code Un G990 2 How to clear storage data FUNCTION a To clear the storage data of all the channels CH5 and CH6 perform the following settings 1 Rewrite the digital input value by using CH5 Digital input value Un G802 so that it is within the settable range 2 Set Error clear request YF to on I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE b Once a check code is stored it will not be cleared until the above setting is performed even if the digital input value by using CH5 Digital input value Un G802 is within the settable range POINT When using the scaling function D A conversion digital input values set in CH5 Digital input value Un G802 are checked Refer to Section 4 3 4 ez gt oO Q Ww x W LL U cao PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 6 34 CH5 Set Value Check Code Un G900 Un G1764 6 34 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 35 CH5 Real Conversion Digital Value Un G902 Un G1774 Digital values equivalent to output analog values can be checked For information on the buffer memory for CH6 refer to Section 6 1 2 and Section 6 1 3 1 Stored data Shifted and scaled setting values of CH5 Digital input value Un G
135. and CH2 Sets average processing of CH2 Sets A D conversion scaling function of CH2 Enables A D conversion of CH3 Sets average processing of CH3 Defaults input signal error detection of CH3 Enables D A conversion of CH5 and CH6 Sets D A conversion scaling function of CH6 Turns on Operating condition setting request Y9 Turns off Operating condition setting request Y9 Reads scaling values of CH1 to CH3 Resets Input signal error detection signal X7 Q PROGRAMMING M als AG lA cries 4 Setting default digital input values oO x11 x0 MOV K6000 D31 J Z mov Koo baz 8 a 5 Writing digital input values o X12 XO UO 1 1 mov D31 802 1 ee O Sets digital input values UO of CH5 and CH6 ai MOV D32 G1002 i f 5 6 Setting enabling analog output a X13 x0 e Y5 9 Wo S Enables analog output 5 2 of CH5 and CH6 ZT CYS 5 OO S 3 J 7 Displaying error codes and resetting X15 XOF ioy Aan 10 Obtains error history 9 latest address WO Outputti d 9 gt z0 Ko Bco Gozo KAY20 J aris CD nee 5 Turns on Error clear z a YOF J request YF wz TOF iG M7 pe Turns off Error clear 1 I r n iF LAST 1k request YF Figure 9 15 Program example without using GX Configurator AD continued x Q Z w a a lt x lt w Q z 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 18 9 2 3 Program example without using the utility package Q PROGRA
136. ange See i High resolution mode 01 5 5 Analog input voltage V Digital output value Digital output value 2 0 to 5V Practical analog input range T 1 High resolution 1 mode 12287 L 1 12000 Normal resolution mode 0 5 Analog input voltage V 4 0 to 10V Practical analog input range I 16383 COO rc a ce yr ee er l i High resolution mode TE l I l l 4095 f D aaas Normal resolution mode 0 10 Analog input voltage V Figure 3 2 Voltage input characteristic 3 2 I O Conversion Characteristic 3 2 1 I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion 3 SPECIFICATIONS M als AG lA orie EIPOINT 1 Set each input range within the practical analog input range and digital output range If these ranges are exceeded the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the performance specifications Avoid using the dotted line area shown in Figure 3 2 OVERVIEW 2 Do not input an analog input voltage of 15 V or more The input element may be damaged 3 If an analog value that exceeds the range for the digital output value is entered the digital output value will be fixed at the maximum or minimum value CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 Table 3 3 Digital output values in the case of an analog value exceeding the range for the digital output value being entered Digital output
137. ange extended mode FUNCTION seeeeeeeesesesesesesesesesecececcccseseceocoeocecececossessesseoe 4 16 4 2 7 Logging function 000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 18 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion COCOOO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOOO OOOOOOOOE 4 25 A 7 4 3 1 D A output enable disable function sseeeeeessssseeeeesesssesecocoosssssccecesssssccecoosssssesecesosses 4 25 4 3 2 Analog output HOLD CLEAR function e eeeeesesesesesesesececeseseceoeeoecececcecessosssssesesesesee 4 25 4 3 3 Analog output test during a CPU module STOP seseseseseeeeececcecceccecececcesosessesosssesssssos 4 27 4 3 4 Scaling function D A COnversion esesesesesesesesesesesececesecesecececoeocoececocecesosososssssssss 4 28 4 3 5 Shifting function D A CONVErSION e eeeeeeeseseseseeeeesesesecesesesececeococecesosososssossssssssssses 4 31 4 4 Details of Common Functione seccccccccco000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 33 4 4 1 Analog conversion enable disable setting COCCOOOO OOOO OOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OO OOOOOOOOOOOE 4 S 33 CHAPTERS I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE 5 1to5 10 5 1 5 2 List of I O Signals cocoooooooooooooooooooooo0ooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F 1 Details of O Signals cccocooocooooooooooooooo0oo000000000000
138. as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction Wiring Precautions CAUTION A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply
139. ata logging is set to be disabled 1 for all channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 6 9 CH1 Input Signal Error Detection Setting Value Un G21 6 14 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 11 CH1 Logging Cycle Setting Value Un G31 and CH1 Logging Cycle Unit Setting Un G32 A storing cycle of data for logging is set Refer to Section 4 2 7 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set a storing cycle of data by using the buffer memory Table 6 13 Setting range of logging cycle CH1 Logging cycle setting value Un G31 500 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 3600 CH1 Logging cycle unit setting Un G32 Sofing value 0 Us b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default The values of the logging cycle setting and logging cycle unit setting are set for all channels CH1 to CH4 as follows e CH1 Logging cycle setting value Un G31 3000 e CH1 Logging cycle unit setting Un G32 0 Es POINT 1 Set the data logging cycle to meet the following conditions e Equal to the integral multiple of the updating cycle e Longer than the updating cycle 2 Unless the logging cycle is equal to the integral multiple of the updating cycle shown in Table 6 14 the logging cycle will be set to the maximum cycle equal to the in
140. atest address on 1 The error code is stored E Ce Un G194 BCD Un G1810 1002 rror NI story 1 Un G1811 Error time Error code Un G390 2402 or CH2 Un G391 Error time More than one error occur The latest error code is stored Un G1814 BCD The latest error information is stored in the buffer memory Un G1840 thus the buffer Un G394 Un G1820 2201 story 2 Un G1821 Error time Error h BUN 0 2 8 n CONN iCmmm CHANGE Error code Un G590 0 2 memory address 1840 is stored or CH3 Un G591 lUnie 1824 BCD in the error history latest address oo 0000H Un G594 Un G1830 2402 Error history 3 Un G1831 Error time Error code Un G790 0 3 or CH4 Un G791 Un G1834 BCD oo 0000H No errors Un G794 Un G1840 5003 ye Error history 4 Un G1841 Error time Error code Un G990 5003 34 a x for CH5 Un G997 Error time Asingle error occurs UniG1844 RBS Qa P pap 4 The error code is stored fai Un G994 BCD Un G1850 0 oO Error history 5 Un G1851 x Error code Un G1190 0 ote 0000H ES for CH6 Un G1191 Un G1854 ae 0000H Un G1194 Error codes Un G1790 0 unrelated to Un G1791 channels os 0000H Se Un G1794 Un G1960 0 SS Error history 16 Un G1961 e 0000H Un G1964 gt x lt W A zZ Figure 11 3 Buffer memory in the case of more than one
141. average Averaging Count average ez processing Moving average 1 If the averaging processing 1 to 3 is set set an amount of time or number of times by using CH1 Averaging process time number of times setting Un G2 Refer to Section 6 4 b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 gt ow Q Ww x W U U ao 2 Default g Sampling processing 0 is set for all channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration a es vao RoE GOE X wW aan x Be a 558 6 2 CH1 A D Conversion Enable Disable Setting Un GO 6 10 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 4 CH1 Averaging Process Time Number of Times Setting Un G2 If the averaging processing 1 to 3 is set set an amount of time or number of times by using CH1 Averaging process method setting Un G1 Refer to Section 4 2 1 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set the range as listed below by using the buffer memory Table 6 8 Settable range Processing method Setting range Time average 2 to 10000 ms Count average 4 to 20000 times Moving average 2 to 60 times 1 To determine the time average set the value meeting the following condition Setting time 4 times x 0 5 ms x Number of channels to be used Total number of A D conversions or D A conversion If the va
142. be switched by using GX Developer 1 Set in Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Switching resolution mode A resolution can be selected from a normal resolution mode 1 4000 and high resolution mode 1 12000 or 1 16000 2 2 Set in Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Scaling function Digital output values can be converted to scaling values ratio and the converted values can be stored into buffer memory In D A conversion an input range of digital input values can be changed to a setting range and the analog output can be performed Shifting function In A D conversion a given value is added to an A D converted digital output value In D A conversion a given value is added to a digital input value and an analog value is output Changing a shifting quantity reflects the output value in real time Therefore the output value can be adjusted with the shifting function when the CPU is powered on Input range extended mode function The analog input range 4 to 20mA and 1 to 5V can be increased to the input range of 0 to 22mA and 0 to 5 5V respectively A D conversion can be performed even if the input range falls below 4mA or 1V when sensors do not measure concrete values Combining the input range extended mode function and input signal error detection function detects a disconnection 3 Set in Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box
143. ccccscccccccoocscs 4 5 O Offset value ececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccccce 3 4 3 9 Offset gain COrrection eeececccccccccccccccccccccccccccce 7 16 Oldest pointer Un G120 ocoooooooooo00000000000000000 2G Online module changE eeseeeeseecesceececococcocccoooo 10 1 Operating condition setting completion flag X9 5 6 Operating condition setting request YQ eesseesee9 5 10 Output enable disable flag Y5 e eeeeeeesessessessosoo 5 9 Output range Setting eeeeeeseeseseeseseeseccesecscesese 7 15 P Prog ramming C0000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 9 1 R Real conversion digital value Un G902 Un G1774 0000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 35 RUN LED eccccccococooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo000000000 7 4 S Sampling period ccooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000 4 3 Sampling processinge eeeeeeeeeeeecescececoocooeoecoeoe 4 3 Scaling function A D Conversion eeeeeeesseeeseee 4 6 Scaling function D A Conversion eeeseeesseseeee 4 28 Scaling value Un G102 UN G1710 ssseseseeseseee 6 21 Serial number ssesescccccooo00000000000000000000000000000 2 6 Set value check code Un G900 Un G1764 6 34 Settable range corresponding to the output ranges Setting range Un G1 12 Peccccccccccccccccccccceeccee 6 24 Setting range Un G912 Ceccccccccccccccccccceccceccee 6 35 Shifting amount to conversion value Un G13 6 13 Shifting amount to input value UN G813 eseeeee9 6 33
144. ccurrence Otherwise resetting the setting value within the setting range and then setting Operating condition setting request Y9 to on clear APPENDIX the error code However the error code marked 2 shown in Table 11 2 and Table 11 3 cannot be cleared by setting Error clear request YF or Operating condition setting request Y9 to on 2 If more than one error occur the error codes will be stored as follows If more than one error unrelated to channels occur the error code of the latest error will be stored into Latest error code Un G1790 If more than one error related to CH1 occur the error code of the latest error will be stored into CH1 Latest error code Un G190 The errors related to CH2 to CH6 will be processed likewise All the errors will be stored into Error history Un G1810 to Un G1964 in occurrence order regardless of whether the error is related or not related to the channel INDEX 11 1 Error Code List 11 4 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG TA eres 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 When RUN LED turns off Table 11 4 When RUN LED turns off i 3 Reference Check item Corrective action j section E T Check that the supply voltage of the power supply module Section wer supplied ae is within the rated range 3 1 Calculate the current consumption of the CPU I O a ne capacity oi the power Sun piy module suricioni intelligent function and other modules mounted
145. ce Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction 7 1 Handling Precautions PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING M eL 2G Q ceries 7 2 Preparatory Procedures and Setting w 0 Module mounting Mount the Q64AD2DA in the specified slot T E 0 Wiring fa m n Connect the external device to the Q64AD2DA AS Intelligent function module switch setting Make switch settings using GX Developer 2 Refer to Section 7 5 lt o ue NO i Use the utility package n Initial setting and Auto refresh setting z Make these settings using the utility package to 2 simplify sequence programs Refer to CHAPTER 8 2 mi Programming and debugging Create and check sequence programs ae S oe ra A nQ Figure 7 1 Preparatory procedures a Yi Se 0 W or Lu TE u gt a ja Zz lt n Ww a ja Ww 1S O a a UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 7 2 Preparatory Procedures and Setting 7 2 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING 7 3 Part Names The following explains the part names of the Q64AD2DA
146. cesecosesesececeocococececososssossscsosesssosesesesesesesee G 23 CH1 Setting Range Un G112 sseeeseeesesesesesecececesececececcecosososososssssssosssosesesesesesesesesesesee G 24 CH1 A D Conversion Completed Flag Un G113 seeeeeeseseeseesesesssssesesocecesesosesesececesececeseose G 24 CH1 Input Signal Error Detection Flag Un G114 eeeeeeseseeseseeceseeseceosececsececceseecoscesescoseeeoe G 25 6 24 CH1 Oldest Pointer UnN G120 sssesesesesesesesesesecececesoccscecococececececcocosoccsososossossssesesesesesee G 26 6 25 CH1 Latest Pointer UM G121 sssesesesesesesesesesescsoseceocececececececececoococccssosoessssssssssssesesesee G 27 6 26 CH1 Logging Data Points Un G122 seseseeeseseeeseseseecececececececececoosescoseososcssosssscssssseseses G 28 6 27 CH1 Trigger Pointer UnN G123 esseeeeeeseseseseseseseseseccccccecececececececocsococoscsosssoosssscsssesesesee G 28 6 28 CH1 Latest Error Code Un G190 CH1 Error Time Un G191 to Un G194 Latest Error Code Un G1790 and Error Time Un G1791 to Un G1794 SOOOSSH SH SH HSH SH HSHHHOHHOHOHOHHOHOHSSHHOHOOSOSEOOOS 6 29 6 29 CH5 D A Conversion Enable Disable Setting UN G800 seeeeeseeseeseeceesocsceceesecsecoeccessessecoee G 3 6 30 CH5 Digital Input Value UN G8O2 e eeeeeseeesesesesesescccscscocococecececoccocessesssssssssosssssessseeeee G 31 6 31 CH5 D A Conversion Scaling Enable Disable Setting UN G810 sseescsseseccccccsccscccccccsccsccseees G 32 6 32 CH5 D A Conversion Scalin
147. code Un G900 Digital input value Un G802 for Tae a 6 30 0003 5 and 6 Minor A and then reset the digital input value to within D A conversion channels are out Section i the range of the setting range 6 34 A value other than 0 1 2 or 3 is R Reset 0 1 2 or 3 for averaging process method 1200 set to CH1 Averaging process ti Section 6 3 setting method setting Un G1 9 Reset the averaging time setting to within 2 to 1to4 Minor A value other than the range from 10000ms 2 to 10000ms is set to CH1 01201 2 Also the set value must be 4 times x 0 5 ms Section 6 4 Averaging process time number x Number of channels used total number of A of times setting Un G2 D conversion and D A conversion or greater 11 1 Error Code List 11 2 MEW ONLINE MODULE BUN 0 2 8 n 0 NCEE CHANGE PROGRAMMING APPENDIX INDEX 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Corresponding Error decimal channel Table 11 3 Errors related to channels continued Description Corrective action MELSEC TA eries Reference section 0202 0203 0210 0211 0212 0250 0251 0252 0253 0254 0255 1400 11 3 1 to 4 1to6 Minor Minor A value other than the range from 4 to 20000 times is set to CH1 Reset the averaging count setting to within 4 to F Section 6 4 Averaging process time number 20000 times of times setting Un G2
148. cy of program development and minimize program bugs to improve program qualities For the details of FB refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Function Block 1 1 Features 1 2 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEG lA srics CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the Q64AD2DA 2 1 Applicable Systems This section describes the applicable systems 1 Applicable modules and base units and number of modules a When mounted with CPU module The table below shows the CPU modules and base units applicable to the Q64AD2DA and the number of modules to be mounted Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Table 2 1 Applicable modules number of mountable modules and applicable base units 1 2 Applicable CPU module Base unit CPU type CPU model Extension base unit QO0JCPU 16 Basic model QCPU QOO0CPU O O Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU 64 O O Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Process CPU ore 64 O Q12PHCPU Q2
149. d 1 1 W We Wwe Un G23550 lt The data that a trigger is executed 2 23550 15000 8550 Q Zz Un G24999 z a Figure 6 10 Status of CH2 Logging data storage area Un G15000 to Un G24999 o z foo lt 8 POINT BSE w TEH If the hold trigger occurs CH1 Logging hold flag X1 is set to on the address of the area storing the latest data at the point will be stored UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 6 26 CH1 Logging Data Points Un G122 6 28 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 28 CH1 Latest Error Code Un G190 CH1 Error Time Un G191 to Un G194 Latest Error Code Un G1790 and Error Time Un G1791 to Un G1794 Latest error codes and error time detected by the Q64AD2DA can be checked Refer to Section 11 1 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 Section 6 1 2 and Section 6 1 3 1 Stored data a CH1 Latest error code Un G190 and Latest error code Un G1790 Latest error codes are stored For the list of error codes refer to Section 11 1 b CH1 Error time Un G191 to Un G194 and Error time Un G1791 to Un G1794 Latest error time is stored in BCD code Table 6 21 Storage data of CH1 Error time Un G191 to Un G194 Buffer memory address Description b15 b12b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 Example
150. d Uninstalling the Utility PackagE e eesescecccececceccccccccccoccocococooceoccccccoccococoooooeooe 3 2 8 2 1 Precautions for use cooocoooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Z 2 8 2 2 Operating environMent ssccccccccoooo0o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 J m 5 8 3 Operating the Utility PackagE eeeeeeeeeececccccocooococcccccccccoccococoococecccccccccceccoccocoooocooeocccceeeee 8 7 A 9 8 3 1 Common operations 0oooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 J 7 8 3 2 Operation overview coooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 J amp 9 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function module Utilityeeeeeeeecceceececccccccccococcoceocecccccccccccccccocoocoooceoo 8 11 8 4 Initial Setting 00000 000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 0000000 OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOD OO OOOO OOOOOCLE 8 os 14 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting 00000000000 0000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 8 oa 16 8 6 Monitor Teste esecccceccccco00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 18 8 6 1 Monitor Test WiNdOW eesesecco00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 18 8 7 FB Conversion of Initial Setting Auto Refresh COCO OO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH
151. d inductions The shielded cable or the shield must be grounded with a single point ground No solderless terminal with insulation sleeve can be used on the terminal block It is recommended to cover the solderless terminals connecting electric cables with a mark tube or insulating tube 7 4 1 Wiring precautions PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELS AG el series 5 The following actions are required for the module to comply with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives a Always use a shielded twisted pair cable and ground it from the control panel through the AD75CK cable clamp manufactured by Mitsubishi In a control panel yazavr90 20 to 30cm gt oO ay Q x ji Figure 7 3 AD75CK cable clamp For details on the AD75CK refer to the following manual L gt AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual 7 4 Wiring 7 4 1 Wiring precautions 7 6 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE me BUFFER MEMORY a Zz T ao w gt a Ww QO O a 0 Z w N UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC TA cries b Install a ferrite core to an external power supply connection cable with keeping it 4cm 1 58 inches away from the module Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 manufactured by TDK Corporation
152. default 1 Configure the settings in the I O assignment tab of GX Developer Refer to Section 7 5 1 Q parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS 1 PLC RAS 2 Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment 1 0 Assignment Type Model name Points Starty PLC Switch setting Intelli Q64AD2DA 16points 0000 Select Detailed setting alalalalaliala afafa fala jaja Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Figure 7 12 I O assignment setting tab 7 5 Setting from GX Developer 7 14 7 5 2 Intelligent function module switch setting OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE me BUFFER MEMORY A Zz lt n Ww a ja Ww 1S a a a UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING M ELSEG Q series 2 Clicking the Switch setting button opens the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Configure the setting with referring to Table 7 8 Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format xX Select HEX Switch 3 Q644D2DA 0000 0000 0000 0000 TATA Cancel Figu
153. dition setting request Y9 is set to on Q64AD2DA Logging data storage area Specified device data Digital output value Hae Ist data Un G100 Un G5001 2nd data Un G5002 3rd data Un G5003 4th data Scaling value Un G5004 5th data Un G102 Un G5005 6th data 5 Un G14998 9999th data gt Un G14999 10000th data If data are stored up to 10000th data point area data will be overwritten from the 1st data area EEEE lt al Figure 4 8 Logging operation 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 7 Logging function 4 FUNCTION MELSEC TA eries 3 Logging start To use a logging facility the following items are required for the initial setting fa Start u T Initial setting performed by users I o Set the following items Logging enable disable setting Logging data setting z Logging cycle setting value Logging cycle unit setting d Logging points after trigger E 0 fa fae Logging hold g E request signal Which Hold trigger will be used ee l Set the item as described bellow Set 0 for Level trigger condition setting Level trigger l Set the following items 2 Do not set the following items Level trigger condition setting Trigger data Trigger data T E Trigger setting value Trigger setting value 6 Level data Z O a ap Figure 4 9 Flowchart of initial sett
154. e The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Figure 10 17 Online module change restart of module control dialog box b Click the button to suspend the online module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer The online module change mode is stopped Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again Figure 10 18 Dialog box informing the suspension of online module change mode 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 1 0 12 10 3 2 When the initial setting has been configured with sequence program _ Ww a ia O Ww O W 0 Zz lt O PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX INDEX 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEG TA eres c Click the button to close the System Monitor dialog box System Monitor Installed status Base Base Module Main base Parameter status Mode 1 0 Address 0 20 System monitor 2 Online module change Powe rsu QOBPHCPU None 16pt Status Module system error amp Module error E Module warning C Module change Close Figure 10 19 System Monitor dialog box
155. e e Network range assignment MNET H Remote master 0000H 1 1 On line Figure 9 18 Network range assignment screen e Refresh parameters 0000 1000 glo ala T 4 O1FI O1FI TFF TFF TOFI TOFI Figure 9 19 Refresh parameters screen 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 3 2 Program example using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC IA series 3 Utility package operation Operate on the remote I O station side PROGRAMMING a Initial setting For operations of the utility package refer to Section 8 4 Configure the initial settings of CH1 to CH3 CH5 and CH6 For details refer to Section 9 2 2 2 b Auto refresh setting For operations of the utility package refer to Section 8 5 aI Set devices storing the following buffer memory data to each item O 1 A D conversion area wg Shifting amount to conversion value Maximum minimum scaling values a Digital output value A D conversion completed flag Scaling value Input signal error detection flag is Maximum minimum digital output values O 2 D A conversion area 5 Digital input value Set value check code m Shifting amount to input value Real conversion digital value 3 3 Common area Error code Level data 0 to 9 Common error code x a Gi lt A Q Z 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 24 9 3 2 Program example using the utility package P
156. e formula 500 s x Number of channels of conversion enabled regardless of whether CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 is enabled ON or disabled OFF f gt SPECIFICATIONS 4 3 2 Analog output HOLD CLEAR function FUNCTION For the case where the CPU module is placed in STOP or in a stop error status whether to hold HOLD or clear CLEAR the analog output value can be set 1 Setting methods ra in tt H H H H Q Set the HOLD CLEAR in Switch 3 cell of Switch setting for I O and intelligent ao function module dialog box Refer to Section 7 5 2 35 D wy 3 QT 2 Analog output status combination SIS Depending on combinations of the HOLD CLEAR setting CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting Un G800 and CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 the S x analog output status varies as shown in Table 4 11 g Table 4 11 Analog output status combination list 7 Setting combination th CH5 D A conversion enable disable l 4 Disable Fra o setting Un G800 Execution Enable or status CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 Disable i disable 9 Analog output HOLD CLEAR setting HOLD or HOLD or S i i HOLD CLEAR oe o function setting CLEAR CLEAR Or ES Outputs analog values converted gao Analog output status when a CPU module is RUN IR Offset OV OmMA lt 5 zZ from digital input values Hoe Analog output status when a CPU module is STOP Hold Offset Offset OV OmA LEO Analog output s
157. e selection completed r Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel Figure 10 3 Online module change module change execution dialog box If the following error dialog box appears click the button remove the module and mount a new module MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Figure 10 4 Error dialog box 1 0 5 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 10 3 1 When the initial setting has been configured with GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEG TA eres c After checking that the RUN LED of the module turned off remove the terminal block external power supply connector and then the module EJ POINT Always remove the module If mounting status is checked without the module removed the module will not properly start and the RUN LED will not turn on 3 Mounting a new module a Mount a new module on the same slot and install a terminal block and external power supply connector b After mounting the module click the button and make sure that the RUN LED turns on Module ready X0 remains off Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H e EAM Module name Q644D2DA Installation confirmation Status Module control restart n Changing module S
158. eT 35 E Ea i E A Rae o Ko LS Te Z P 2 R 5 iz 7 LN De E i t a p 2 tp AT U io T p 90 3 54 f L 112 4 41 J 27 4 1 08 lt Unit mm inch INDEX Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 1 APPENDIX MELSEG TA eres Memo App 2 Appendix 1 External Dimensions INDEX A ALM LED eccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccccccccccoccoscoscecs 7 4 Analog conversion enable disable setting ss s 4 33 Analog output HOLD CLEAR functionssssessesseees 4 25 Analog output HOLD CLEAR function setting 7 15 Analog output test during a CPU module STOP Auto refresh setting oooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000 3 1 Averaging process method setting Un G1 e s 6 10 Averaging process time number of times setting UN G2 eeeseeeecccseccecececcoceccesecoccoseceesseeeoscee G11 Averaging PFOCESSINGeeereeeeccccccccccccccccccccccccocs 4 3 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 s ssese 6 24 A D conversion completed flag XE sessesesseeseeees 5 7 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO 6 10 A D conversion methods eeececcccccccccccccccscsccceces 4 3 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G1 0 COCCOOOOOOOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOOOOOOOOOCE 6 1 1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value Un G11 COCO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OS OOOOE 6 1 2 A D conversion scaling upper limit value Un G12 COCO COO OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH
159. ecked with CH1 Logging data points Un G122 The number of data points is set from when a trigger is executed until when a logging hold is executed CH1 Logging points after trigger Un G34 Un G13449 Un G13450 Un G14999 Latest data 13449 5000 8449 Oldest data 13450 5000 8450 Initial buffer memory address in the logging data storage area CH1 Oldest pointer Un G120 Figure 4 13 The held logging data point is 10000 Example The held logging data point is less than 10000 CH1 Oldest pointer Un G120 Initial buffer memory address Oldest data 5000 5000 0 The data that a trigger is executed 8049 5000 3049 CH1 Logging data storage area Un G5000 to Un G14999 Un G5000 gt __ _ Un G8049 The number of data points is set from when a trigger is executed until when a logging hold is executed Valid data the number of valid data points can be checked with CH1 Logging data points Un G122 CH1 Logging points after trigger F Un G34 Initial buffer memory address CH1 Trigger pointer Un G12499_ Ve Tl ooo a2 Un G12500 Latest data 12499 5000 7499 Invalid data The values stored in these data are not determined Un G14999 Figure 4 14 The held logging data point is less than 10000 CH1 Latest pointer Un G121 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 7 Logging function 4 23 OVERVIEW CONFIGU
160. econd Day of the week 1885 Error history to System area 1889 1890 Error code 1891 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1892 Md History 9 Sohne Month Day 0 R 1893 Hour Minute 1894 Second Day of the week 1895 to System area 1899 1900 Error code 1901 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1902 Md History 10 Seapine Month Day 0 R 1903 Hour Minute 1904 Second Day of the week 1905 to System area 1909 1910 Error code 4911 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1912 Md History 11 nahin Month Day 0 R 1913 Hour Minute 1914 Second Day of the week 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G LY series Table 6 4 Error history Un G1800 to Un G1964 Item Address decimal ne History number Description Default Read write 2 1915 fa to System area Z 1919 u 1920 Error code 2 1921 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1922 Md History 12 aries Month Day 0 R z 1923 Hour Minute B 1924 Second Day of the week 1925 a to System area gt 6 1929 1930 Error code 1931 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year n TE Md History 13 Erortim MORIR Day 0 R 5 1933 Hour Minute lt 1934 Second Day of the w
161. ect input 2 ao jem Sear nos vng joo Deak aE w aaw Make text file End setup Cancel Make text file End setup e e Figure 8 7 Initial setting windows x 9 la t S e f g E Q x W ZSF Ed TE a2s tes EBS aE EI Q FEAS 8 4 Initial Setting 8 14 8 15 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEC TA cries Description 1 Setting items Set A D conversion D A conversion enable disable and averaging process method for each channel 2 Command buttons Make test file Writes data displayed in the window to a file in text file format End setup Saves settings and exits the window Cancels settings and exits the window POINT 8 4 Initial Setting The initial setting is stored to an intelligent function module parameter After the initial setting is written to the CPU module it becomes valid by operation of either 1 or 2 1 Switch the RUN STOP switch of the CPU module in the order of STOP RUN STOP and RUN 2 With the RUN STOP switch set to RUN power off and then on or reset the CPU module When using a sequence program the initial setting parameters are written at the time the CPU module status changes from STOP to RUN So create the sequence program so that the initial setting will be reexecuted UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEG
162. ed range Analog input current mA The value in parenthesis refers to the digital output value in high resolution mode Expanded range Expanded range Analog input voltage V The value in parenthesis refers to the digital output value in high resolution mode Figure 4 6 I O characteristic of input range from 4 to 20mA Figure 4 7 I O characteristic of input range from 1 to 5V Extended mode Extended mode 2 Setting methods Configure the input range for CH1 to CH4 in Switch 1 cell of the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Refer to Section 7 5 2 4 POINT If the input range extended mode function scaling function for A D conversion and shifting function for A D conversion are used simultaneously the scaling value can exceed the range from 32768 to 32767 In such a case the values set within the upper limit 32767 and lower limit 32767 values will be stored into the buffer memory as scaling values 4 16 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 6 Input range extended mode function 4 FUNCTION MELSEC A eres 3 Disconnection detection Combining the input range extended mode function and input signal error detection E function detects a disconnection If the input analog current value changes to 2mA or less or the input analog voltage value changes 0 5V or less an external wiring is disconnected and CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 is set
163. eek i 1935 i to System area 2 1939 1940 Error code Error history P First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1942 Md History 14 Erortins Month Day 0 R z 1943 Hour Minute 5 1944 Second Day of the week 5 1945 to System area 1949 1950 Error code E 2 1951 First two digits Last two digits of Fa S f of the year the year 22 1952 e History 15 Error time Month Day f z 5 5 1953 Hour Minute Su 1954 Second Day of the week SIE 1955 6 to System area 1959 amp 1960 Error code 1961 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year w 1962 ma aca Error time Month Day R i 1963 Hour Minute 1964 Second Day of the week 1 Pr indicates the setting data and Md indicates the monitoring data a 2 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled Z z0 R Read enabled FS y W Write enabled ES vao RoE f woe X u aan x 9 ge 234 S52 158 a E w E88 596 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 8 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 5 Logging area Un G5000 to Un G49999 Table 6 5 Logging area Un G5000 to Un G49999 Address decimal Description Default Read write 2 5000 to CH1 Logging da 14999 15000 to CH2 Logging da 24999 25000 to CH3 Logging da 34999 35000 to CH4 Logging da 44999 45000 to System area 49999 o oO A o oO aA Md Logging area o oO A o oO vs 1 Pr
164. efresh m WD Device to which CH6 Error code is written by auto refresh 3 WE Device to which a common error code is written by auto refresh W80 Device to which CH5 Digital input value is written by auto refresh w81 Device to which CH6 Digital input value is written by auto refresh D20 Representation error D21 CH1 Scaling read value D22 CH2 Scaling read value iS D23 CH3 Scaling read value i D31 CH5 Initial digital input value x D32 CH6 Initial digital input value x20 Device turned on by user to start reading a scaling value X21 Device turned on by user to set initial digital input value X22 Device turned on by user to write digital x input value QX10 X20 to X2F a X23 Device turned on by user to enable analog outputs of all channels X24 Device turned on by user to reset input signal error detection X25 Device turned on by user to reset an error Y30 to Y3F Error code display 4 digits in BCD QY10 Y30 to Y3F X1000 Module ready X1007 Input signal error detection signal X100F Error flag Y1005 CH5 Output enable disable flag Q64AD2DA X Y1000 to X Y100F Y1006 CH6 Output enable disable flag Y1009 Operating condition setting request Y100F Error clear request 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 22 9 3 2 Program example using the utility package 9 23 PROGRAMMING MELSEG iQ series 2 GX Developer operation setting of the network parameter e Network type e Starting I O No e Network No e Total stations e Mod
165. ely GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common System configuration parameter settings and online operations common to Simple project and SH 080779ENG Structured project of GX Works2 13JU63 Sold separately The manuals are included on the CD ROM for the software package in PDF format The printed manuals are sold separately When obtaining a manual individually order it by quoting the manual number model code in the table above eeeeeoeseeveeoeseeaoeeeoeoeneeceoeaeseeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeseseeeeaeeeee eee COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 For programmable controller system To configure a system meeting the requirements of the EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporating the Mitsubishi programmable controller EMC and Low Voltage Directives compliant into other machinery or equipment refer to Chapter 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES of the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The CE mark indicating compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives is printed on the rating plate of the programmable controller 2 For the product For the compliance of this product with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives refer to Section 7 4 1 Wiring precautions GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations Generic term abbreviation Description Q64AD2DA Abbreviation for the Q6
166. er CH1 Initial setting start flag M103 Initial setting in process flag M104 Initial setting completion flag M200 M201 CH1 Initial setting transfer check flag M202 CH1 Initial setting completion flag M210 M211 CH2 Initial setting 1 transfer check flag M212 M220 M221 CH2 Initial setting 1 completion flag CH2 Initial setting 2 transfer check flag M222 CH2 Initial setting 2 completion flag M230 M231 M232 CH3 Initial setting 1 transfer check flag CH3 Initial setting 1 completion flag M240 M241 M242 CH3 Initial setting 2 transfer check flag CH3 Initial setting 2 completion flag M250 M251 CH5 Initial setting transfer check flag M252 CH5 Initial setting completion flag M260 M261 CH6 Initial setting 1 transfer check flag M262 CH6 Initial setting 1 completion flag M270 M271 CH6 Initial setting 2 transfer check flag M272 CH6 Initial setting 2 completion flag MELSEC Aeres Device for checking the master station status Device for write operation of the initial settings for the Q64AD2DA M280 M281 Buffer memory A D conversion channel area transfer check flag M282 M290 M291 Buffer memory A D conversion channel area read completion flag CH5 Digital input value transfer check flag M292 CH5 Digital input value write completion flag M300 M301 CH6 Digital input value tra
167. ersion of CH2 is stored X Un G400 CH3 A D conversion enable disable setting O Enable CH3 a j Set the process method A Un G401 CH3 Averaging process method setting 3 a CH3 Moving average lt Set the average number of moves CH3 Averaging process time number of Un G402 10 times when moving average has times setting been set Un G420 CH3 Input signal error detection setting 1 Set these items to use CH3 Error detection n Error detection method Upper and X lt Un G421 CH3 Input signal error detection setting value 100 i u lower detection 2 Error detection setting range 10 Measured CH3 Scaling value is Un G502 CH3 Scaling value stored Completion status of the first A D Un G513 CH3 A D conversion completed flag conversion of CH3 is stored Un G514 CH3 Input signal error detection flag CH3 Error detection status is stored Un G800 CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting O Enable CH5 oo Measured CH5 Digital input value is Un G802 CH5 Digital input value stored Un G1000 CH6 D A conversion enable disable setting O Enable CH6 ar Measured CH6 Digital input value is Un G1002 CH6 Digital input value stored CH6 D A conversion scaling enable disable Un G1010 0 setting Set these items to use CH6 Scaling Un G1011 CH6 D A conversion scaling lower limit value 1000 function Un G1012 CH6 D A conversion scaling upper limit value 5000 The buffer memory address storing Un G1800 Latest address
168. ery sampling processing regardless of the status of CH1 Averaging process method setting Un G1 Example When the number of conversion enabled channels is three the disconnection detection is executed every 1 5ms 5004s x 3CH 1500us 1 5ms I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 17 4 2 6 Input range extended mode function 4 FUNCTION 4 18 4 2 1 MELSEC TA eries Logging function 1 Logging function 2 This function collects the data of the digital output value or scaling value performed A D conversion at a preset timing in series This function is useful to check the data change of the digital output value or scaling value performed A D conversion periodically because the function sets an interval logging period performs logging and stores the logs into the buffer memory In addition this function is useful to check the data change of the analog input value during the stopped logging if a trigger condition is set by using a hold trigger Logging operation When logging starts in sequence programs logging data are stored into the logging data storage areas in order from the initial area Logging data can be stored up to 10000th data point area for a channel The stored data are retained until when the CPU module is powered off or Operating con
169. etting window Auto refresh setting Initial setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q64AD2DA Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q64AD2DA Setting item Setting value A D conversion area CH1 Initial setting CH1 Initial setting CH2 Initial setting CH2 Initial setting CH3 Initial setting CH3 Initial setting CH4 Initial setting CH4 Initial setting D A conversion area Module side Module side Transfer PLC side Buffer size Transfer direction Device word count Setting item A D conversion area CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value CH2 Shifting amount to conversion value CH3 Shifting amount to conversion value CH4 Shifting amount to conversion value CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value CH3 Digital output value CH4 Digital output value CH1 Scaling value CHS Initial setting Make text fie End setup Refer to Section 8 5 Refer to Section 8 4 CHO Initial setting CH Olnitial setting window CH1 Initial setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q644D2DA Setting item Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Disable CH1 Averaging process method setting Sampling processing CH1 Averaging process
170. evices are X Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR LE When using a bit device X Y M L or B set a number that Y E iy can be divided by 16 points example X10 Y120 M16 Buffer memory data are stored by 16 points starting from the device whose number was specified For example if X10 is set data are stored X10 to X1F e e x 9 ra gq S 5 2 g E Q x Lu Z5 lt Pad TE Eey tes S D aE E w Q FEAS 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting 8 16 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEC TA eries 2 Command buttons Make text file Writes data displayed in the window to a file in text file format End setup Saves settings and exits the window Cancels settings and exits the window POINT The auto refresh setting is stored to an intelligent function module parameter After being written to the CPU module the auto refresh setting takes effect by either 1 or 2 1 Switch the RUN STOP switch of the CPU module in the order of STOP RUN STOP and RUN 2 With the RUN STOP switch set to RUN power off and then on reset the CPU module The auto refresh setting cannot be changed from the sequence program However processing equivalent to auto refresh can be added to the sequence program using the FROM TO instructions 8 17 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX
171. from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and wate
172. fter the data link start in the remote I O network initialization is not performed 1 0 13 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 10 3 2 When the initial setting has been configured with sequence program 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEG TA eres 5 Restarting control a After choosing Diagnostics Online module change in GX Developer to display the Online module change screen again click the button to resume controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the module PROGRAMMING _ Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H Module name Q64AD2D4 Ww a ia O Ww O W 0 Zz lt O Installation confirmation Status Change module installation completion Module control restart Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute TROUBLESHOOTING Cancel Figure 10 20 Online module change restart of module control screen b Dialog box informing the completion of online module change appears APPENDIX MELSOFT series GX Developer e 1 Online module change completed Figure 10 21 Dialog box informing the completion of online module change INDEX 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 1 0 14 10 3 2 When
173. g Lower Limit Value Un G811 and CH5 D A Conversion Scaling Upper Limit Value Un G812 COCO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOS OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOOOOOE 6 33 6 33 CH5 Shifting Amount to Input Value Un G813 sseeeeeeeseeeeecececsesceccosesceccososossssssscscsesesesee G 33 6 34 CH5 Set Value Check Code Un G900 Un G1764 sseeeeeeececesesecececsesesecoscsscssssssssescsssesesee G 34 6 35 CH5 Real Conversion Digital Value UN G902 UN G1774 seeeeeeesessesessececscoccccococeccoseesoseese G 35 6 36 CH5 Setting Range UnN G912 ssseeesesesesesesesesesccosecoccececccecececececcososcesscsosesososssssssssesesee G 35 6 37 CH5 HOLD CLEAR Setting Function Un G913 eeeeseeeseeeseseseecesecececececeeseceessosososssosssssee G 35 6 38 Level Data UN G1600 to UN G1609 seeeseseeesesesesescecececececececececeosecocseososcsssssssesssesssesee G 36 6 39 Latest Address of Error History UnN G1800 eseseseseseseseeeeeeeececececececececeesececosososssssssesesee G 37 6 40 Error History UN G1810 to UnN G1964 seseseseseseseseseseseccscececocececececececocsecesososossssssseseses G 37 6 41 CH1 Logging Data Storage Area Un G5000 to Un G14999 eeeseeseeeeeeeeseeesecoccoceoseocceseecseoee G 38 CHAPTER7 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING 7 1to7 20 7 1 Handling Precautions ccooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 7 2 Preparatory Procedures and
174. g cycle setting value setting ranges Un G31 For the details of the logging cycle refer to Sectio ction CH1 Logging cycle unit setting POINT of Section 6 11 6 11 Un G32 f Reset the logging cycle to be the updating cycle The logging cycle falls under the of the logging data or more updating cycle of the logging data For the details of the logging cycle refer to Section 6 11 A value other than 0 or 1 is set to s Section CH1 Logging data setting Reset the logging data setting to 0 or 1 6 12 Un G33 i A value other than the range from Reset the load Ateanerheti Secti e e n n rigge ectio 0 to 9999 is set to CH1 Logging R er eer pues occurrence to within 0 to 9999 6 13 points after trigger Un G34 A value other than 0 1 2 or 3 is Resetineleveiti dit inact Sodi e e er conditio n A ectio set to CH1 Level trigger condition 059 e eve trigger condition seting to a 2 or 3 6 14 setting Un G35 A value other than the range from Secti ection 0 to 1999 is set to CH1 Trigger Reset the trigger data to within 0 to 1999 6 15 data Un G36 i A value other than 0 or 1 is set to CH1 A D conversion scaling Section 6 5 Reset the setting whether to enable or disable enable disable setting Un G10 or i Section i i scaling to 0 or 1 CH5 D A conversion scaling 6 31 enable disable setting Un G810 11 1 Error Code List 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING M als AG lA orie Table 11 3 Errors
175. g process method setting Setting value Enable Sampling processing CH1 Averaging process time number of times setting Sampling processing 0 Time averaging 2 to 10000 Count averaging 4 to 20000 Move averaging 2 to 60 CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value Disable CH1 A D conversion scaling upper limit value Details Select input Setting range Enable Disable Make text file End setup Figure 9 11 CH1 Initial setting A D conversion area window b Auto refresh setting CH5 Initial setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Module model name Q644D2DA Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item CH5 D A conversion enable disable setting CHS D A conversion scaling enable disable setting Setting value Enable Disable CHS D A conversion scaling lower limit value CHS D A conversion scaling upper limit value CHS Shifting amount to input value Details Select input Setting range Enable Disable Make text file End setup Figure 9 12 CH5 Initial setting D A conversion area window Set devices storing the following buffer memory data to each item 1 A D conversion area Shifting amount to conversion value Digital output value Scaling value Maximum minimum scaling values A D conversion completed flag Input signal error detection f
176. g the utility package SA Nt boat it MELSEG Q series Checks master station baton pass s atus Checks master station data link status Checks remo e I O station baton pass status Checks remo data link status Checks remo e I O station e I O station parameter communication status Checks mast status Enables A D of CH1 er module conversion Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC kaleres 2 2 Initial setting of CH2 1 A D conversion enable setting count average setting l 2 M202 i Enables A D conversion S ama i aaa aaa D KO D1010 of CH2 Mov K2 D1011 7 oO Sets averaging x processing of CH2 mov K50 Do2 _____ 7P REMTO St K1 Ki HO K200 D1010 K3 M210 hf a M210 M211 2 AE SET M212 fe u 2 3 Initial setting of CH2 2 scaling setting g E mov Ko Do3 J z Sets A D conversion Mov K1000 D1014 scaling function of CH2 a zZ MOV K5000 D1015 5 O a ZP REMTO J K1 K1 HO K210 D1013 K3 M220 a al M220 M221 5 t SET M222 2 ke 2 4 Initial setting of CH3 1 A D conversion enable setting moving average setting M222 F i FMOV KO D1020 1 pas A D conversion K3 D1021 Sets averaging processing of CH3 x K10 D1022 j a Gi o K3 M230 J G M230 M231 4 SET M232 2 5 Initial setting of CH3 2 input signal error detection setting M232 MOV Ki D1030
177. h channel e CH2 Scaling function A D conversion g CH2 A D conversion scaling lower limit value 1000 9 CH2 A D conversion scaling upper limit value 5000 5 e CH3 Input signal error detection function gt CH3 Input signal error detection setting Upper and lower detection F CH3 Input signal error detection setting value 100 10 e CH6 Scaling function D A conversion CH6 D A conversion scaling lower limit value 1000 CH6 D A conversion scaling upper limit value 5000 5 W d When a write error occurs the corresponding error code is output to an output a module in BCD x lt al z 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 20 Q PROGRAMMING 9 21 MELSEC TA eries 9 3 1 Before program creation This section explains works required before program creation 1 Wiring of external devices Mount the Q64AD2DA on a base unit and wire external devices to CH1 to CH3 CH5 and CH6 For wiring method refer to Section 9 2 1 1 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Based on the setting conditions given in Section 9 3 2 configure the intelligent function module switch setting For details refer to Section 9 2 1 2 Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX Type Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 es es ae ee O so o Remote 1 0 Remote 120 1 Joo inteli 06440204 ozo omoj 0100 2 11 1 Figure 9 17 Intelligen
178. he program that writes a shifting amount to A D conversion scaling upper limit conversion value an A D conversion scaling upper limit value value or an A D conversion scaling lower limit value to A D conversion scaling lower limit buffer memory if necessary value 0 RET Figure 7 14 Offset gain correction example A D conversion 7 17 7 6 Offset Gain Correction PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC IA series POINT 1 When offset gain are corrected using the scaling function and shift function fa resolution may be reduced In the example of Figure 7 14 the resolution is reduced at 0 125 2 When offset gain are corrected using the scaling function and shift function the functions cannot be used for other applications 3 When a module is replaced online corrected offset gain data are not taken over to a new module Correct the offset gain following the procedures in T Figure 7 14 after online change ii nz os i Zz O lt O m O W D Zz O E O Z ra v H 2a ae Diy QE amp O W i i a 7 fm Zz T ao w gt a Ww QO O a 0 Z w N UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 7 6 Offset Gain Correction 7 18 T 19 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING ELSEG series 2 D A conversion Example When executing offset gain correction under the following condition Digita
179. ing a Common setting items To use a logging facility set the items shown in Table 4 6 Table 4 6 Initial setting for logging facility FUNCTION ao Reference Item Description section Logging enable disable a g Set the item to be enabled 0 Section 6 10 setting Set whether to perform logging digital output values or scaling Logging data setting Section 6 12 values Logging cycle Set the cycle to store data during logging Section 6 11 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE Set the amount of logging data after hold triggers are detected Logging points after trigger eat Section 6 13 and before logging is held Logging facility Initial setting Refer to 3 in this section Logging facility start Y Logging facility hold Refer to 3 b in this section BUFFER MEMORY Y Logging hold flag check Y Logging data read and save Refer to 4 in this section PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING v Logging restart Y End Figure 4 10 Flowchart of operating procedure GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 19 4 2 7 Logging function 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres b Hold trigger Hold trigger is the trigger that occurs for the case of preset trigger conditions to be met when a logging facility is used When the Q64AD2DA detects a hold trigger the logging facility stops
180. ing UN G32 sseccesesseesee 6 15 Logging data points UN G122 eseeseesesceseeseeeeee 6 28 Logging data setting UN G33 eocceccccccccccccccccce 6 16 Logging data storage area Un G5000 to Un G14999 Logging enable disable setting UN G30 s eseese9 6 14 Logging facility Ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccooocce 41 8 Logging hold flag X1 cooooooooooooooo000000000000000000 D3 Logging hold request Y1 ccooooooooooooooo000000000000 D Q Logging points after trigger UN G34 eeeseeeeese00 6 16 M Maximum and minimum values hold function sss s 4 6 Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag XD COCCOOOOOO OO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOOE 5 7 Maximum and minimum values reset request YD COC OCOCOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOO 5 1 0 Maximum digital output value Un G104 Un G1720 COC OOCO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO HOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOO 6 22 Maximum scaling value Un G108 Un G1740 6 23 Index 1 PROGRAMMING ONLINE MODULE CHANGE TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX INDEX Minimum digital output value Un G106 Un G1721 cescececoeccooccocecseccocecoocccocccocesoeccocecooessoessoee B 22 Minimum scaling value Un G110 Un G1741 6 23 Mode setting ccoooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000 15 Module ready 040 5 2 Monitor Test ecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvcscses 3 13 Moving AVETAGE eeeeeccccccccccccccccscc
181. ion scaling lower iit vabe T 0 aopa ponasigt Tna aagig2 w CH5 D A conversion scaling upper imit value ol a ERT etek We AON Mie eres CH5 Shiting amount to input value ol o CHT A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Dperating condition setting request No request No request lt CH1 A D conversion scaling lower irit value CHT A D conversion sealing upper imit value CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value CHT Input signal error detection lag CHT Input signal eror detection setting Disable B Flash ROM setting Flash ROM setting Details Curent value Monitoring Current value Monitoring display splay Select input Select input Make text file Setting range Make text fle Setting range Enable Enable Disable Disable Stop monitor Execute test Stop monitor Execute test Close Figure 8 9 Monitor Test window continued 8 19 8 6 Monitor Test 8 6 1 Monitor Test window UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSECK Description 1 Display items OVERVIEW Setting item Displays I O signals and buffer memory names Current value Displays I O signal status and current buffer memory values Setting value Select or input data to be written by test operation 2 Command buttons CONFIGURATION SYSTEM urrent value display Displays the current value of the selected item This button is used to check characters that cannot be displayed in the Current value field I
182. ions a Used channels A D conversion CH1 to CH3 D A conversion CH5 and CH6 CH4 is not used in the program examples b Use the following A D conversion methods for each channel e CH1 Sampling processing e CH2 Count average 50 times e CH3 Moving average 10 times c Use the following functions for each channel e CH2 Scaling function A D conversion CH2 A D conversion scaling lower limit value 1000 CH2 A D conversion scaling upper limit value 5000 e CH3 Input signal error detection function CH3 Input signal error detection setting Upper and lower detection CH3 Input signal error detection setting value 100 10 e CH6 Scaling function D A conversion CH6 D A conversion scaling lower limit value 1000 CH6 D A conversion scaling upper limit value 5000 d When a write error occurs the corresponding error code is output to an output module in BCD 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration Q PROGRAMMING M als AG lA ceries 9 2 1 Before program creation This section explains works required before program creation PROGRAMMING 1 Wiring of external devices Refer to Section 7 4 2 Mount the Q64AD2DA on a base unit and wire external devices to the following channels Table 9 3 Channels to which external devices are wired 5 A External device Wiring channel z Ww met Current CH1 and CH2 4 9 npu
183. it value F displayed Setting is not required Setting is not required Shifting amount to input value 0 since this item is not since this item is not used The default value used The default value is displayed is displayed 1 Click the Initial setting button of setting target channel In the program example set CH1 to CH3 CH5 and CH6 Setting of CH4 is not required since CH4 is not used Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q64AD2DA Setting item Setting value A D conversion area CH1 Initial setting CH1 Initial setting CH2 Initial setting CH2 Initial setting CH3 Initial setting CH3 Initial setting CH4 Initial setting CH4 Initial setting conversion ar CHS Initial setting l CH5 Initial setting CHE Initial setting CHE Initial setting Details Figure 9 10 Initial setting window 9 11 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 2 2 Program example using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 2 Clicking the Initial setting button of each channel opens a window as shown below Set the initial setting items listed in Table 9 5 and Table 9 6 in the window The following is the example windows of CH1 Initial setting and CH5 Initial setting CH1 Initial setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Module model name Q644D2DA Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting CH1 Averagin
184. ith the Q64AD2DA Executed with sequence program CPU power supply ON Module ready X0 OFF 1 ON External power supply OFF OFF lt gt gt lt A D conversion H A D conversion A D conversion and D A conversion and D A conversion and D A conversion are not executed are executed are not executed ON ON External power off flag X6 OFF Th OFF ON Error clear request YF OFF L B ocr Figure 5 3 Timing diagram for the case of turned on external power supply after the CPU module is powered on 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 4 5 2 1 Input signals OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS S31 FUNCTION E as 22 96 iy r o BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA D I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE M ELSEG Q series g Set Module ready X0 to on and External power off flag X6 to off for digital or analog outputs as shown below Digital value write command XO X6 U0 4000 is stored into j MOVP K4000 G802 J CH1 Digital input value Un G802 Figure 5 4 Program example for the case of digital or analog outputs 4 Input signal error detection signal X7 a This signal is set to on when the analog input value falls outside the range of the input signal error detection setting value for CH1 Input signal error detection set
185. itten values are displayed in the Current value field Up to here the Q64AD2DA has been operated with the setting before configuring settings of 2 to 4 Set the Setting value field of Operating condition setting request to Setting request Click the Execute test button while the Setting value field of Operating condition setting request is selected to validate the setting PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING e e 7 x 8 lt eeeeeseeeeoeaeceoeesceeaceaeseeaeeeeeeeceeeesceeceeceeceaes eee eeeeeeeee 8 x 9 la q S 5 2 e E e x W ZSF Ed S55 a2s tes S D aE E Q FEAS 8 6 Monitor Test 8 20 8 6 1 Monitor Test window UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX 8 7 FB Conversion of Initial Setting Auto Refresh Purpose Convert automatically an intelligent function module parameter initial setting auto refresh setting into an FB Operating procedure Window for selecting a target intelligent function module Select the FB Support Parameter tab Click the button Setting dialog box FB conversion FB program is generated from the following contents Start 1 0 Module model Initial No name aie FB program name Figure 8 10 FB conversion dialog box Description 1 Display items Start I O No Displays the start I O number set to the open intelligent function module parameter Module
186. l Sets default input signal error detection of CH3 MOV K100 D1031 J x w S ZP REMTO J K1 Ki HO K420 D1030 K2 M240 M240 M241 SET W242 2 6 Initial setting of CH5 D A output enable setting l M242 Enables D A conversion f f 1 MOV KO D1040 of CH5 ZP REMTO J K1 K1 HO K800 D1040 K1 M250 J M250 M251 T 44 SET M252 J 2 7 Initial setting of CH6 1 D A output enable setting M252 Enables D A conversion MOV KO D1050 of CH6 ZP REMTO J K1 K1 HO K1000 D1050 Ki M260 Figure 9 24 Program example without using GX Configurator AD continued 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 32 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING M260 M261 H SET 2 8 Initial setting of CH6 2 scaling setting M262 a ih MOV KO MOV K1000 MOV K5000 D1060 K3 M270 M271 HF SET 2 9 Turning on Y1009 after all initial setting data 2 1 to 2 8 are written normally M103 M202 M212 M222 M232 M242 M252 M262 M272 i SS St St St St tt E i x10009 X1009 Y1009 1 I ji it RST SET 3 Reading scaling values and other values X20 M104 X1000 Y1009 M282 p eee SET o gt RNR K Ki Ho Ko D2000 K600 M104 X1000 M280 M281 D21130 E mov D2102 D2313 0 pee H MOV D2302 D2513 0 H py page JST M281 E Lp RST M262 D1060 a E D1061 k ti D1062 M270 M272 a Y1009 Lt M202 M212 M
187. l input Analog output Digital input Analog output D A conversion Value walle D A conversion 24U valle example before 0 0 2mA lexample after 0 0 0mA correction Icorrection 4000 20 3mA 0 20 0mA Setting range 0 to alls a lt 4000 4000 gt Offset gain correction Shift Scaling y Set Enable for Conversion enable disable setting Un GO of the offset gain correction target channel y Set 0 used as a digital input value to measure the analog output value Example Analog output value 0 2mA Y Adjust Shifting amount to input value to make the analog output value be Setting Shifting amount to input value 40 OmA and record the value hd Set 4000 used as a digital input value to measure the analog output value and record the value Example Analog output value 20 1mA lt Record this 20 10 20 3 0 2 20 1 Calculate a scaling setting value 1 Fix the D A conversion scaling lower limit value to 0 2 Calculate the D A conversion scaling upper limit value Real conversion digital value 4 4000 x 4000 4020 3980 Calculate a real conversion digital 4000 7 value and calculate D A conversion scaling upper limit value with the scaling operation expression i 1 20 1 20 0 1mA i 2 20 4000 0 005mA ios ae Digital input SA A 3 0 1 0 005 20 Dig D A conversion __ D A con
188. lag Maximum minimum digital output values 2 D A conversion area Digital input value Shifting amount to input value 3 Common area Error code Common error code 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration Set value check code Real conversion digital value Level data 0 to 9 9 12 9 2 2 Program example using the utility package ONLINE MODULE CHANGE PROGRAMMING o TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX INDEX Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres For operations of the utility package refer to Section 8 5 For setting of PLC side Device in the Auto refresh setting window refer to the assignment shown in 1 in this section Device list Auto refresh setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q64AD2DA Module side Module side Transfer PLC side Buffer size Transfer direction Device word count Setting item CH1 Scaling value CH2 Scaling value CH3 Scaling value S44 Scaling value NA NA 4 A D conversi D A conversion area CH5 Digital input value CHE Real conversion digital value Common area CH1 Error code CH2 Error code CH3 Error code CH4 Error code CH5 Error code CHE Error code Latest error code in common area Make text file End setup Cancel Figure 9 13 Auto refresh setting screen c Writing intelligent function module parameters Refer to Section 8 3 3 Write the intel
189. le controller will not malfunction To prevent an electric shock and malfunction of operating modules provide means such as switches for powering off each of the external power supply and external devices connected to the module to be replaced online It is recommended to perform an online module change in the actual system in advance to ensure that it would not affect the other modules by checking the following e Means of cutting off the connection to external devices and its configuration are correct e Switching on off does not bring any undesirable effect After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE M aL AG lA eries 10 1 Execution Condition of Online Module Change To change a module online the following CPU module MELSECNET H remote I O module Q64AD2DA GX Developer and base unit are required PROGRAMMING _ 1 CPU module The Process CPU or Redundant CPU are required For precautions for redundant system configuration refer to the QnNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Ww a ia O Ww O W oO Zz T O 2 MELSECNET H remote I O module Use the module of function version D or later oO zZ 3 GX Developer 9 Use GX Developer Version 7 10L or later 5 Use GX Developer Version 8 18
190. ligent function module detailed setting dialog box Configure the setting with referring to the following Intelligent function module detailed setting a H W error Z Slot Type Model name Eroe time PLC 1 0 response Control PLC mode operation time ial mode 0 PLC PLC X X X X 1 10 0 Intelli Q64AD2DA Clear A Stop v v X 2 fit X X 3 22 4 x x x 5 4 3 3 x v X X 5 fata z 6 565 Setting for a programmable x HES controller CPU stop error z 9 868 z 5 lt Figure 7 11 Intelligent function module detailed setting dialog box Table 7 7 Setting item in the Intelligent function module detailed setting dialog box Item Description Set whether to clear or hold analog outputs in case of CPU module stop error Error time output mode Clear Clears analog outputs in case of link error default Hold Holds analog outputs in case of link error 7 5 Setting from GX Developer 7 5 1 Intelligent function module detailed setting PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q series 7 5 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Configure input range setting output range setting analog output HOLD CLEAR function setting and resolution mode setting in this setting The intelligent function module switch setting has switches 1 to 5 and is configured with 16 bit data If the switch setting is not configured all the switches are set to 0 by
191. ligent function module parameters to the CPU module Configure the setting in the window for selecting a target intelligent function module 9 13 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 2 2 Program example using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING M als e6 Q R 3 Program example Reading scaling values PROGRAMMING o X10 XO Y9 t peee D4 Ki ov Di D21 D5 KI m w D22 nas erry vallesot DS KI mov D3 D23 F W gt 2 Detecting an input signal error and processing the error detection a x0 Processing CH3 input signal 2 a 1 g input signa w by Ki 4 error detection f 29 x14 x7 as Resets Input signal error ZI a SET YOF OO i J detection signal X7 3 Setting default digital input values X11 XO o MOV K6000 D3i Z E 9 MOV K3000 D32 ha vas edits ct W 4 Writing digital input values a X12 XO tt H MOV D31 DII O i L Bats x S Sets digital input values hs of CH5 and CH6 MOV D32 D12 fi J 5 Setting enabling analog output X13 XO mim oso y 5 Enables analog output of CH5 and CH6 x Y6 X G u A a r P n W 6 Displaying error codes and resetting o Latest error codes are not always displayed G If users want to display the latest error codes refer to Section 9 2 3 X15 XOF e i KO D13 KO mov DI3 D20 y D14 KO iv D14 D20 x lt KO DIS KO 7 MOV DIS D20 J u Zz D16 KO n ts D20
192. ll phases before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions N CAUTION Ground the FG terminal to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction After wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range Undertightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in short circuit or malfunction Prevent foreign matter such
193. ls Description A hardware error of the module A value other than 0y is set to the Switch 5 in the intelligent function module switch setting Corrective action Power off the module then on again If the same error occurs the module may have failed Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Set Op to the Switch 5 in the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer 1 Setting Error clear request YF to on cannot clear this error code b Errors related to channels Table 11 3 lists the error codes related to channels If an error occurs the error code will be written to CH1 Latest error code Un G190 according to the channel where the error occurs Error code Corresponding Table 11 3 Errors related to channels Description Corrective action Reference section Section 7 5 2 Reference decimal channel section The setting range is set with an ae Mode illegal value in the intelligent Set a correct parameter value in the parameter Section z rate function module switch setting in setting of GX Developer 7 5 2 GX Developer 1to6 A value other than 0 or1 is set to CH1 A D conversion enable N Section 6 2 Reset 0 or 1 to enable or disable the 002 Minor disable setting Un GO or CH5 D Section conversions A conversion enable disable 6 29 setting Un G800 The digital input values set in CH5 Section ee Check CH5 Set value check
194. lue that does not cause Digital value out of range error error code O 003 2 This setting example shows 6119 as a settable upper limit value and the real conversion digital value is 12286 Therefore the analog output value corresponding to the real conversion digital value 12287 will not be output UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion 4 29 4 3 4 Scaling function D A conversion 4 FUNCTION 4 30 MELSEC TA eries As indicated in the formula of 4 in this section or Figure 4 16 the value exceeding the D A conversion scaling upper limit or the value that falls below the D A conversion lower limit can be set for a digital input value However the analog output value corresponding to the real conversion digital value exceeding the range cannot be ensured Moreover when setting the values of settable upper and lower limits the real conversion digital value could not reach the maximum or minimum value 5 Precautions a Use of scaling function D A conversion and resolution Even if the digital input value range is enlarged with the scaling function D A conversion the resolution will not be more than the one applied when the scaling function is not used As the digital input value range is narrowed the resolution is lowered b When a digital input value range not including zero 0 such as 1000 to 6000 is specified When a digital input value ra
195. lue that does not meet the above condition is set an error error code 0201 will occur and zero 0 will be stored into the digital output values b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default The value 4 is set for all channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration If necessary set the different value 6 5 CH1 A D Conversion Scaling Enable Disable Setting Un G10 Whether to enable or disable a scaling conversion of digital output values is set Refer to Section 4 2 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set whether to enable or disable the A D conversion scaling by using the buffer memory Table 6 9 CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G10 Setting value Description 0 A D conversion scaling enabled 1 A D conversion scaling disabled b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default The A D conversion scaling is disabled 1 for all the channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration 6 11 6 4 CH1 Averaging Process Time Number of Times Setting Un G2 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC Aeres 6 6 CH1 A D Conversion Scaling Lower Limit Value Un G11 and CH1 A D Conversion Scaling Upper Limit Value Un G12 OVERVIEW A scaling range of converted digital out
196. mments and other applications and then start GX Developer and Intelligent function module utility I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE 4 Starting Intelligent function module utility a Select QCPU Q mode in PLC series of GX Developer and set a project If not Intelligent function module utility does not start BUFFER MEMORY b Multiple Intelligent function module utilities can be started However only one Intelligent function module utility can operate Open parameters and Save parameters in the intelligent function module parameter The other utilities can operate Monitor test only PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING e e x 9 la t S 5 f g E Q x W ZSF Ed S55 a2s tes S D aE E w Q FEAS 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 8 2 8 2 1 Precautions for use UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX 5 Window switching among multiple Intelligent function module utilities When multiple Intelligent function module utility windows cannot be simultaneously viewed select a screen to be displayed to the foreground with the task bar a Start iP MELSOFT series GX D Intelligent function m Intelligent function m Figure 8 1 Display example of the task bar 6 The number of parameters that can be set with GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted set parameters within the following
197. mmon operations UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA MELSEC IA seri 8 3 2 Operation overview Figure 8 5 shows operations using the GX Configurator AD window The same operations apply to GX Configurator DA Window for selecting a target intelligent GX Developer window function module Edit mode MAIN 35 Step Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW 06 E C lt stics Window Help Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help Check program al x Tools Intelligent function Select a target inteligent function module Confirm project memory size Start 1 0 N Module t z e e Module Start auam aaup Merge data EIES 1 pooo A D Conversion Module Check parameter Transfer ROM lt lt ______ Module model name Delete unused comments 0644D2DA Clear all parameters IC memory card Parameter setting module Start ladder logic test n TEIE FB Support Parameter Sau VEL dake A Start 170 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh 0000 6440 204 Utility list Customize keys Change display color Options FB parameter gt gt FX special Function utility Initial setting Autoretresh Refer to Section 8 3 3 gt O Initial setting Auto refresh setting Initial setting window Auto refresh s
198. module Start 1 0 No Module type 0000 a d Conversion Module Module model name 06440204 Parameter setting module intelligent function module parameter MAM AEE Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh lt O000 G644D2D4 Available Available aaa eee Se eee lt lt Parameter FB conversion Initial setting Auto refresh Delete Exit Figure 8 6 Window for selecting a target intelligent function module Description 1 Display of other screens Open the following screens from the Intelligent function module utility window common to the Intelligent function module parameter tab and the FB Support Parameter tab a Initial setting window Input Start I O No gt Select Module type gt Select Module model name gt Click the Initial setting button b Auto refresh setting window Input Start I O No gt Select Module type gt Select Module model name gt Click the Auto refresh button c Select monitor test module dialog box Select Online Monitor Test 4 Input a start I O number in hexadecimal 8 11 8 3 Operating the Utility Package 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function module utility UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA L M E 2G Kel ceries When the FB Support Parameter tab is activated d Display of the FB conversion dialog box z jag FB Support Parameter tab gt
199. monitoring data to make Trigger data Section 6 15 level triggers work Trigger setting value Set a value that makes level triggers work Section 6 16 This data is the data that monitor data to make level triggers work Set this level data to monitor devices specified for CPU Level data Section 6 38 modules or the like excluding the buffer memory of the Q64AD2DA and make triggers work 4 20 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 7 Logging function 4 FUNCTION M als e6 aries ON CH1 Logging hold request Y1 OFF Trigger condition enable disable Disable Enable waiting for trigger condition Trigger condition satisfied not satisfied 1 Not satisfied Satisfied Hold trigger occurred Logging hold ee l l CH1 Logging data storage area Data stored before latest Un G5000 to Un G14999 i 10000 are discarded eee I gt i Logging points after trigger Un G34 i 4 gt Logging data points Un G122 lt 10000 1 A hold trigger occurs when the condition set in Table 4 8 is satisfied Figure 4 12 For detecting hold triggers by using level triggers 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 21 4 2 7 Logging function OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM A SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA e
200. n 6 2 PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING 2 How to clear storage data To clear the storage data of all channels CH1 to CH4 set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 6 21 CH1 Setting Range Un G112 6 24 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 4 POINT When reading the digital output values use A D conversion completed flag XE or CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 as an interlock 6 23 CH1 Input Signal Error Detection Flag Un G114 An input signal status can be checked For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Stored data Table 6 20 Storage data of CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 Setting i Input signal status value 0 Normal 1 Input signal error a An input signal error 1 will occur for CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 in the following case e The Q64AD2DA detects an analog input value being out of the range set with CH1 Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 b If an error is detected in even one of the following settings Input signal error detection signal X7 will be set to on 1 Set to enable set to one of 1 to 4 the input signal error detection setting by using CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 2 Set to enable A D conversion set to 0 by using CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO
201. n 6 1 1 and Section 6 1 3 Zz O 1 Stored data lt o a Storage form Eg Digital values are stored into the buffer memory in 16 bit signed binary form Do b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO CH1 Maximum digital i output value Un G104 Zz CH1 Minimum digital 2 output value Un G106 v S Data part i T D Sign bit 1 Negative value 0 Positive value Figure 6 6 Storage data of CH1 Maximum digital output value Un G104 and CH1 Minimum digital output value Un G106 b Updating cycle 5 The updating cycle is the time for sampling processing number of channels to be S used x 5004s T 2 How to reset storage data 4 To reset the storage data of all channels CH1 to CH4 perform any of the following Qa operations E e Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to change the setting 65 we Yi e Set Maximum and minimum values reset request YD to on QE If the storage data is reset the maximum and minimum values measured after the reset will be stored for all the channels CH1 to CH4 ez gt a ie WW x W E m aa PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 6 19 CH1 Maximum Digital Output Value Un G104 Un G1720 and CH1 Minimum Digital Output Value amp 99 Un G106 Un G1721 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 20 CH1 Maximum Scaling Value Un G108 Un G1740 and CH1 Minimum Scaling Value Un G110 Un G
202. n be checked by installing either GX Configurator AD or GX amp A Configurator DA E amp The setting and setting states can be checked with the installed GX Configurator AD and GX i S Configurator DA g Q E 2 For the FB conversion function use GX Developer 8 or later oan EJPOINT Depending on the version of GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA CPU 43 l SSF modules and functions of the Q64AD2DA vary 5 Be Eeg 568 2 4 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 5 MELSEC TA cries 2 2 Using the Q64AD2DA with Redundant CPU 1 GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA cannot be used when accessing the Redundant CPU via an intelligent function module on an extension base unit from GX Developer Connect a personal computer to the Redundant CPU with a communication path indicated below Main base unit Extension base unit GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA cannot be used T Connecting directly to a programmable controller CPU Connecting to a programmable controller CPU via an intelligent function module Ethernet module MELSECNET H module or CC Link module on the main base unit Figure 2 1 Communication path for GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA 2 2 Using the Q64AD2DA with Redundant CPU 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M aL 2G fel ceries
203. n completed flag JOFF No completed CH2 Maximum scaling value Ed W z Flash ROM setting Detaile Flash ROM setting Details fr 2 E KoE Monitoring Gure vee Monitoring w in HT Cannot execute test Cannot execute test aan Make text file Make text file e e Stop monitor _ Stop monitor Figure 8 9 Monitor Test window x 9 la t S e f g E Q x W ZSF Ed TE a2s tes EBS aE E Q FEAS 8 6 Monitor Test 8 18 8 6 1 Monitor Test window UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX CH1 to CH4 Operating CH5 CH6 Operating condition setting condition setting CH5 Operating con CH1 Operating condition setting Module information Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Stat 0No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Start 0 No 0000 Module model name Q64AD2DA Module model name QB44D2DA Setting Rem Current value Setting value Setting tem Curent value Seting value CHT A D conversion enable disable seting Enable Disable CH5 D A conversion enable disable seting Enable Dieabie CHT Averaging process method setting Sampling processing Sampling processing CH5 D A conversion scaling enable disable zetting Disable Disable z AT Averea nce ne 7 huamka ef remetra CH5 D A convers
204. n history Device Setting condition Y9 Force OFF Force ON Module start 0 Address 1000 D Module start 0 Address 800 D Module start N Address RANDI lt Figure 10 1 Device test dialog box 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 1 0 4 10 3 1 When the initial setting has been configured with GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA 1 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEG TA eres 2 Removing a module a After choosing Online module change Mode in the dialog box opened by selecting Diagnostics Online module change of GX Developer double click a module to be changed online to display the Online module change dialog box System Monitor Installed status Base Base Module Main base Cer i Unmol unti ng MasterPLC gt QOBPHCPU Parameter status r Mode 1 0 Address 10 System monitor 0 1 Online module change Powe Intelli None rsu QOBPHCPU gent pply 16pt 16pt Status El Module system error i Module error Module change Figure 10 2 System Monitor dialog box b Click the button to enable the online module change Online module change Operation r Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 00H ay Module name Q644D2D4 Installation confirmation i Status Module control restart Change modul
205. n this utility package all characters can be displayed in this field though Make text file Writes data displayed in the window to a file in text file format tart monitor Select whether to monitor data in the Current value field top monitor SPECIFICATIONS xecute test Tests the selected item To select multiple items select items while pressing the Ctrl key lose Closes the open window and returns to the previous window eeseeeeevseeeaeeoeeeaeeceeceeseceaoeeeee eee eee eceaeeeeeeeeea eee ed FUNCTION 9 The following explains a test operation Execute test using an example where the count averaging of CH1 Sampling processing is changed to 10 and the setting is validated 1 Click the CH1 Operating condition setting button in the Monitor Test window 2 Set the Setting value field of CH1 Averaging process method setting to Count averaging 3 Click the Setting value field of CH1 Averaging process time number of times setting I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE 4 Input 10 as the average number of processing times and press the key At this point the setting data have not been written to the Q64AD2DA 5 Select the Setting value fields input in the operations 2 to 4 while BUFFER MEMORY pressing the Ctrl key Multiple fields can be selected by dragging the mouse over them 6 Click the button to write the data After the writing is completed the wr
206. nalog input range Setting mode alan ae oe seca aa ike Q to the scaling to the scaling i lower limit value upper limit value a 4 to 20mA Extended mode Normal resolution mode 0 4000 ib 1 to 5V Extended mode High resolution mode 12000 a Q A Zo O W or 42 vao RoE GOE X u aan x 9 Be ES 558 6 6 CH1 A D Conversion Scaling Lower Limit Value Un G11 and CH1 A D Conversion Scaling Upper Limit 6 12 Value Un G12 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 6 7 CH1 Shifting Amount to Conversion Value Un G13 A quantity to be shifted using the shifting function A D conversion is set Refer to Section 4 2 4 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set a quantity to be shifted by using the buffer memory e Settable range 32768 to 32767 b If a quantity to be shifted is set the value set as a digital output value using CH1 Digital output value Un G100 will be added regardless of whether to set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on or off 2 Default The value 0 is set for all channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration 6 8 CH1 Input Signal Error Detection Setting Un G20 Whether to output the warning of the input signal error detection or stop is set Refer to Section 4 2 5 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set a method detecting warning by using the buffer memor
207. nction program 1 1 f Shift function program oO i Input signal error detection function program 1 i zZ ad l Logging function program 1 t Initial setting Auto refresh setting f g Refer to Section 8 3 2 Section 9 2 2 i 1 i Initial setting for i a D A conversion i a i D A conversion enable disable program Scaling function program X 1 Shift function program 1 i i p l I 1 i i A A a a S 2 A D conversion program x y i a a Program for reading digital output 2 Program created for the function to be used Z i values or scaling values i ee m i YES 1 Use the A D conversion function 1 1 1 i Shift function program 2 j d Input signal error detection function program 2 i is i f W 1 f Q i Zz a Program for writing digital values 3 Program created for the function used YES Use the D A conversion function b Scaling function program 3 c Shift function program 3 e a S 4 Auxiliary program 4 i Y i i a Error reset program 4 Program added for the target to be controlled i Program if necessary Y End programming Figure 9 1 Programming flowchart 9 1 Programming Procedures 9 2 Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA cries 1 Overview of the program examples The following processing is separately explained in the program examples a Initial setting program of the Q64AD2DA b A D conversion p
208. nd GX Configurator DA select Help Product information of GX Developer ed OVERVIEW Product information Programming and Maintenance tool yy GX Developer Version 8 79H S W8D5C GPPW E COPYRIGHT C 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Product is licensed to z O T oc 5 0 LL Z Q oO Name MITSUBISHI Company Mitsubishi Electric Corporation ProductID wo Zz List of version information on Add in software 2 GX Configurator A Version2 10L S 2D5C Q4DU E E COPYRIGHT C 2004 QE ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL L RIGHTS RESERVED O Software version mf GX Configurator DA Version2 10L S W2D5C QDAU E es COPYRIGHT C 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Warming This product is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law Zz O O 5 Product information dialog box of GX Developer Version 8 re Figure 2 5 Product information dialog box 8 3 Z 2a 96 oF SF gt a O W az Lu mE uw a e Z Zo W Oor ES vao RoE a Wor eo w aaw x 2 s oT Seg OSL S Eg gt 55 E8 saz E 5 596 2 3 Checking Function Version Serial Number and Software Version 2 8 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEG TA eres CHAPTER3 SPE
209. ng shock to the module case 2 Do not remove the printed circuit board of the module from the case 3 4 Doing so may cause failure Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation 5 Tighten the screws such as module fixing screws within the following ranges Undertightening can cause short circuit failure or malfunction Table 7 1 Tightening torque Screw Tightening torque range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48N m Terminal block terminal screw M3 screw Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw External power supply connector screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58N m 0 66 to 0 89N m 0 5 to 0 6N m 1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw when using the module in an environment of frequent vibrations 6 To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located 7 in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into pla
210. ng status of the intelligent function module switch setting is displayed Table 11 12 Intelligent function module switch setting status Reference Intelligent function module switch setting i section 1 Switch 1 Input range setting CH1 to CH4 2 Switch 2 Output range setting CH5 and CH6 3 Switch 3 Analog output HOLD CLEAR function setting CH5 and Section CH6 7 5 2 4 Switch 4 Mode setting 5 Switch 5 H W Information Module Display format Module Name Q644D2DA Product information 110310000000000 C HEX H w LED Information HAW SW Information No Value No Value 1 0001 iL 8000 44 2 gt 0000 2 0000 3 o000 Stop monitor Figure 11 2 H W Information dialog box 1 1 9 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 7 Checking the Q64AD2DA status 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG TA eres oO 2 How to check error with buffer memory Z a Current errors can be checked with buffer memory Refer to Section 11 1 g O b Past errors can be checked with buffer memory Refer to Section 11 1 Example If error codes are configured as the following order each error information will be 2l stored into buffer memory as shown in Figure 11 3 5 e Error code 1002 2201 2402 5003 w z O Error code Un G190 1002 Error history Un G1800 1840 14 for CH1 Un G191 Error time A single error occurs l
211. nge not including zero 0 such as 1000 to 6000 is specified set CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 to on after setting values within the input range in CH5 Digital input value Un G802 If CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 is set to on with the default value 0 set in CH5 Digital input value Un G802 an error error code 1003 will occur Setting example The following setting causes an error error code L1003 Setting example Output range 0 to 5V Resolution mode High resolution mode 0 to 12000 CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit value Un G811 1000 CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 6000 CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 is turned on when CH5 Digital input value Un G802 is in initial value 0 status Digital values used for D A conversion _12000 0 _ 1000 0 6000 1000 2400 Since this digital input value is out of the scaling range 1000 to 6000 set an error error code 11003 occurs Figure 4 17 Example of setting range c The settable range of the values that scaling conversion is performed for digital values set in CH5 Digital input value Un G802 can be checked 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion 4 3 4 Scaling function D A conversion 4 FUNCTION MELSEC E srie 4 3 5 Shifting function D A conversion The shifting function adds a setting quantity to a digital input value shifting a analog output value
212. nsfer check flag M302 CH6 Digital input value write completion flag M310 M311 Buffer memory error code area transfer check flag M312 Buffer memory error code area read completion flag 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network Device for write read operations to the Q64AD2DA buffer memory 9 28 9 3 3 Program example without using the utility package ONLINE MODULE CHANGE PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX INDEX Q PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 2 List of used buffer memory addresses The Z P REMFR or Z P REMTO instruction is used to access the buffer memory of the Q64AD2DA Check the access device in the Address device column in Table 9 13 Table 9 13 List of used buffer memory addresses i A Setting Address device Description Remarks value CH1 A D conversion enable disable Un GO D1000 0 Enable CH1 setting Measured CH1 Scaling value Un G102 D2102 CH1 Scaling value is stored Completion status of the first Un G113 D2113 CH1 A D conversion completed flag A D conversion of CH1 is stored CH2 A D conversion enable disable Un G200 D1010 0 Enable CH2 setting Un G201 D1011 CH2 Averagi s method setting 2 Bee process method veraging process method setti gngip s CH2 Count average Set th ber of CH2 Averaging process time number of A average S Un G202 D1012 50 processes times when times setting
213. nversion 0000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000 8 21 Function version C0000000 000000000000000000000000000000000 2 6 G Gain value 000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000 3 4 3 9 H High resolution mode status flag X8 eseeseeseeseees 5 6 Hold trigger SOOOHH SOOO SSH OHOHHOHOHOSHOHSOHSOHSSHHHOHHSOOOOEE 4 20 HOLD CLEAR setting function UN G913 sssee 6 35 I Initial setting ccoooooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000 3 14 Input range extended mode function sserseeeeeeeeee 4 16 Input range setting cooocoooooooooooooooooooo000000000000 7 15 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 sess9996 25 Input signal error detection fUNCtIONs seseseeeeeeeeee 4 11 Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 s 996 13 Input signal error detection signal X7 sesessessesees 5 5 Intelligent function module detailed setting s s 7 12 Intelligent function module switch setting s sessess 7 14 I O conversion Characteristic eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseoe00 3 4 L Latest address of error history Un G1800 s e 6 37 Latest error code Un G190 eccccccccccccccccccccoses 0 29 Latest pointer UN G 121 eeccecccccccccccccccccccccccce 6 27 Level data Un G1600 to UN G1609 eeseeseeeeeeeee 6 36 Level trigger condition setting UN G35 sseeseseese 6 17 List of I O signals Ceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccs 5 Logging cycle setting value UN G31 eseeseeseesee 6 15 Logging cycle unit sett
214. nversion sequence group 1 and group 2 Table 4 18 Conversion sequence of A D conversion channels and D A conversion channels 3 D A conversion A D conversion channel channel Group 1 CH1 CH2 CH5 Group 2 CH3 CH4 CH6 2 Conversion sequence The sequence of the analog conversion depends on the channels that enable conversion as shown below a Sequence of the analog conversion for the case of the all channels that enable conversion All conversion periods xt 3ms gt t lt Group 1 gt Pit lt Group 2 gt gt D A conversion A D conversion A D conversion D A conversion A D conversion A D conversion D A conversion A D conversion CH6 CH1 CH2 CH5 CH4 CH6 CH1 5004s 5004s 5004s 5004 s 5004s 5004s 5004s Figure 4 19 Sequence of the analog conversion for all channels that enable conversion b Sequence of the analog conversion for the case of CH1 CH3 and CH5 enable conversion All conversion periods 1 5ms All conversion periods 1 5ms CH5 CH3 5004 s CH3 500 us CH3 5004s CH1 5004s CH5 5004s 5004s Figure 4 20 Sequence of the analog conversion for the case of CH1 CH3 and CH5 enable conversion 4 4 Details of Common Function 4 4 1 Analog conversion enable disable setting 4 33 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM A SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER
215. o on when the maximum value and minimum value stored into the following buffer memory reset by setting Maximum and minimum values reset request YD to on e CH1 Maximum digital output value Un G104 e CH1 Minimum digital output value Un G106 e CH1 Maximum scaling value Un G108 e CH1 Minimum scaling value Un G110 Seago asen gt Executed with the Q64AD2DA Executed with sequence program The digital output values or the scaling values are stored when YD is turned on Maximum and minimum values storage area GHT Maximundigital output value oe Maximum and minimum values Yy Maximum and minimum values y CH1 Minimum digital output value Un G106 before turning on YD after turning on YD CH1 Maximum scaling value Un G108 CH1 Minimum scaling value Un G110 ON H Maximum and minimum values poo reset request YD 1 aoe ON Maximum and minimum values a al reset completion flag XD OFF Figure 5 7 Timing diagram of Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag XD 8 A D conversion completed flag XE a This flag will be set to on when first conversions for each channel that A D conversion is enabled has been completed 1 Not relevant to the channels that D A conversion is enabled b If the external power supply for the Q64AD2DA turns off A D conversion completed flag XE will flow as shown in the section of External power off flag X6 Refer
216. of a project opened with GX Developer can be operated Intelligent function module utility C Mee Melee Online To Open parameters Reads a parameter file Close parameters Closes a parameter file If the file has been modified a dialog box asking for Open parameters Ctrl O sii cules save will appear Delete parameters Save parameters Saves a parameter file Delete parameters Deletes a parameter file Exit Open FB support parameters Opens an FB support parameter file Save as FB support parameters Saves an FB support parameter file Exit Exits Intelligent function module utility b Online menu Monitor Test Displays the Select monitor test module dialog box Read from PLC Reads intelligent function module parameters from the T Monitor Test F CPU module raa Write to PLC Writes intelligent function module parameters to the CPU POINT 1 Saving intelligent function module parameters in a file 2 3 Save intelligent function module parameters by the operation in the window for selecting a target intelligent function module shown above since they cannot be saved in a file by the project save operation with GX Developer Reading writing intelligent function module parameters using Read from PLC Write to PLC of GX Developer Read from PLC and Write to PLC can be performed after intelligent function module parameters are saved in a file e Select Online T
217. of error history the latest error code is stored Un G1810 Error history 1 to t The error code of the current error is o stored Un G1960 Error history 16 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 16 9 2 3 Program example without using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING 3 Program example 1 Programming the Q64AD2DA initial setting 0 yg X9 r y sv KO toy E pi IE mov k50 lt Mo o ov c w K1000 K5000 1 w Mo mov K3 poy O c mw K MOV K100 c fw o c Ti ko meee HOY KO pty mov 1000 K5000 ST UO0 GO UO0 G200 U0 4201 U0 G202 U0 G210 U0 G211 U0 G212 UO G400 U0 G401 U0 G402 U0 G420 U0 G421 U0 G800 U0 G1000 U0 G1010 U0 G1011 U0 G1012 Y9 Yo D21 D22 D23 S x0 Yg X9 eo p ir 2 Reading scaling values X10 XO 9 U0 UO y G113 KI mov G102 UO UO G313 KI s G302 UO UO G513 KI Mov G502 3 Detecting an input signal error and processing the error detection X0 an KI J Processing CH3 input signal X14 X7 error detection Ppa SET YOF Figure 9 15 Program example without using GX Configurator AD 9 17 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 2 3 Program example without using the utility package MELSEC TA cries Enables A D conversion of CH1
218. on mode settings will be invalid to the Q64AD2DA 2 2 Operating procedure fe we xt 1 Double click PLC Parameter in the project screen of GX Developer 2 H 7 O 2 Click the I O assignment tab W N 3 Set the following items for a slot where the Q64AD2DA is mounted and click the Detailed setting button Q parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLCRAS 1 PLCRAS 2 Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment ie O 1 0 Assignment Z i Type Model name Points Stary a m gt Q644D2D4 16 px 0000 Select i E telli 44D 2DA Bpoints z m elect CEE z z gH X X X OD Assigning the I O address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically wa Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur N e i Figure 7 10 I O assignment tab 5 2 96 Table 7 6 Setting items in the I O assignment tab Z m Type Select Intelli Model name Input the model name of the module Points Select T points Start XY Input the start I O number of the Q64AD2DA a 1 The above dialog box shows an example when the Q64AD2DA is mounted on a slot 0 oc E a ja Zz lt n Ww a ja Ww 1S O a a UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 7 5 Setting from GX Developer 7 12 7 5 1 Intelligent function module detailed setting PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING T 13 MELSEC TA eries 4 Clicking the Detailed setting button opens the Intel
219. on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 OVERVIEW 1 Stored data Table 6 18 Stored data of CH1 Setting range Un G112 Setting Analog input range value OH 4 to 20mA 1H 0 to 20mA 2H 1 to 5V 3H 0 to 5V 4H 10 to 10V 5H 0 to 10V AH 4to20mA Extended mode Ba 1to5V Extended mode _ CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS EJPOINT The setting range cannot be changed by using CH1 Setting range Un G112 Change the setting range in the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Refer to Section 7 5 2 FUNCTION 6 22 CH1 A D Conversion Completed Flag Un G113 An A D conversion status can be checked For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE 1 Stored data ez a If an A D conversion is completed for the channel enabling A D conversion for a first time the first data informing the completed A D conversion 1 will be stored into the buffer memory Table 6 19 Storage data of CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 Setting gt ow Q Ww x uw LL U ao A D conversion status value 0 A D conversion unused or in first A D conversion 1 First A D conversion completed b Immediately after A D conversion is completed for all the channels enabling the conversion A D conversion completed flag XE is set to on Refer to Sectio
220. onnector to the terminal until the connector clicks into place Anterior surface of a module Insert the connector into the terminal until the connector clicks into place Bottom surface of a module Figure 7 8 Module side 3 Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example of shielded twisted pair cables example of CH1 analog voltage input DOZ N Connect the shield of the connecting cable to the FG terminal E Groundin L Protective ground conductor Figure 7 9 Wiring example of shielded twisted pair cable EIPOINT When removing an external power supply connector from a module hold the connector part Pulling by the cable part may result in damage to the module or cable or malfunction 7 11 7 4 Wiring 7 4 3 Wiring of external power supply connector PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING M eL 2G Q ceries 7 5 Setting from GX Developer This section explains settings configured in GX Developer to operate the Q64AD2DA 7 5 1 Intelligent function module detailed setting 1 Purpose 6 When using the Q64AD2DA in remote I O station specify the control CPU z When using the Q64AD2DA in usual system configuration mounted on the main o H i H H 4 H base or extension base the specification is not required since Error time output Bz mode and H W error time PLC operati
221. ons Applicable wire size 3 3mm AWG12 Single wire 0 2 to 0 8mm x 2 Size when inserting two Stranded cables into one terminal 0 2 to 0 8mm x 2 wire External power supply connector screw 5 Pay 0 5 to 0 6N m M3 screw External power supply connector accessory Figure 7 6 When inserting two cables into one terminal Table 7 5 shows the terminals of external power supply connector Table 7 5 Terminals of external power supply connector Terminal Signal name External power supply 24V External power supply 24V Grounding 7 9 7 4 Wiring 7 4 3 Wiring of external power supply connector PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING M eL 2G Q ceries 2 Wiring method 1 Insert a cable to the terminal of external power supply connector g Check the terminal layout before wiring i Next tighten the external power supply connector screw to secure the cable 2 zZ O amp x o Bottom surface irs Zz of a module 2S nO i Zz O lt O m S External power supply mi N connector accessory Zz O O Figure 7 7 Module bottom 5 Ww 8 3 Z 65 Dw QE amp O W a Lu Ww Ww a a Zz T ao w gt a Ww QO O a 0 Z w N UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 7 4 Wiring T7 10 7 4 3 Wiring of external power supply connector PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING M ELSEG Q series 2 Insert the c
222. opened by selecting Online Transfer setup of GX Developer The intelligent function module parameters can be written by e Directly connecting GX Developer to the remote I O station e Routing the network to the remote I O station by connecting GX Developer to a device such as a CPU module 9 25 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 3 2 Program example using the utility package Q PROGRAMMING M als e6 Q R 4 Program example es Reading scaling values PROGRAMMING X100 Y 1009 w4 Ko piy o a a F 7 KI m ip m2 y R oo W6 K1 Taa O W3 D23 W J I gt 2 Detecting an input signal error and processing the error detection a X1000 z Processing CH3 input signal 2 u W7 Ki wo error detection Zz X24 X1007 as q Resets Input signal error T p SET Y100F OO f i detection signal X1007 3 Setting default digital input values X21 X1000 2 oO I MOV K6000 D3i i A O MOV K3000 D32 7 Q i g 4 Writing digital input values a X22 X1000 5 2 iN j Wv D3 woo J eee ee Q A eee a ae values fe o an MoV D32 w81 J P 5 Setting enabling analog output X23 X1000 S l Y1005 2 Enables analog output 7 of CH5 and CH6 S CY1006 J a 6 Displaying error codes and resetting g Latest error codes are not always displayed G If users want to display the latest error codes refer to Section 9 3 3 X25 X100F J K wg KO mov we D20 O w9 KO iv w9
223. or codes are not displayed until when thejError History button is clicked Latest error code A latest error code is displayed One digit Error unrelated to channels 4 Error code Four digits Error related to channels Le Error code for the target channels Channel number of an error The four digits 6002 refers to the error error code L002 that occurred in CH6 Figure 11 1 Module s Detailed Information dialog box 1 The latest error code among the error codes in the list shown in Section 11 1 3 and Section 11 1 3 is displayed in the Present Error field 2 The error history can be checked in the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 1 11 8 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 7 Checking the Q64AD2DA status 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG TA eres b H W information Click the H W Information button in the Module s Detailed Information dialog box 1 H W LED information Left side in the Module s Detailed Information dialog box The LED status is displayed from 1 to 3 fields The display indicated by the arrow 4 is not related to H W LED information Table 11 11 LED status RUN LED 0000 Indicates that LED turns off z ERR LED 0001H Indicates that LED turns on Alternate indication between 0000H and 0001H Indicates that LED blinks 3 ALM LED 2 H W switch information Right side in the Module s Detailed Information dialog box The setti
224. ormed at the time of setting CH1 Logging hold request Y1 to on b If the level trigger condition setting using CH1 Level trigger condition setting Un G35 is valid 1 to 3 set CH1 Logging hold request Y1 to on When CH1 Logging hold request Y1 is set to on the logging status moves to trigger condition waiting status If the setting condition of the level trigger is satisfied a logging hold will be performed c If CH1 Logging hold request Y1 is set to off during a logging hold the hold will be canceled and the logging data will be resumed d For the logging facility refer to Section 4 2 7 e For information on timings of when CH1 Logging hold request Y1 is set to on or off refer to the section describing CH1 Logging hold flag X1 Refer to Section 5 2 1 2 CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 For information on the output signals for CH6 refer to Section 5 1 a Specify whether to output the D A converted value or output the offset value for each channel e ON D A converted value e OFF Offset value b The D A conversion speed does not change regardless of whether CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 is set to on or off Refer to Section 4 3 1 and Section 4 4 1 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 2 2 Output signals 5 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE M aL 2G Q ceries 3 Operating condition setting request Y9 a Set this signal to on when making any of the following buffer memory valid
225. put values is set Refer to Section 4 2 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Setting method a Set an A D scaling conversion range by using the buffer memory Settable range 32000 to 32000 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default The value 0 is set for all channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration When using a scaling function A D conversion change the setting value POINT 1 Setting a value outside the setting range described in 1 a in this section or a value that does not meet the inequality Upper limit gt Lower limit will cause an error Refer to Section 11 1 2 When using a scaling function A D conversion check that the A D conversion scaling using CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G10 is made valid 0 SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION If the A D conversion scaling is set to be invalid 1 scaling upper and lower limit values will be ignored 3 If the analog input ranges are set as listed below the digital output values corresponding to the scaling upper and lower limit values respectively will be the values listed in Table 6 10 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE 6 Table 6 10 Digital output values corresponding to the scaling upper or lower value Digital output value gt Cc di Cc di nS A
226. r damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical doc
227. ransfer setup in GX Developer and set the target CPU module e When mounting the Q64AD2DA on a remote I O station use Read from PLC and Write to PLC of GX Developer Checking required utility While the start I O number is displayed in the Intelligent function module utility window may be displayed in the Module model name field This means that the required utility has not been installed or the installed utility cannot be started from GX Developer Check the required utility by selecting Tools gt Intelligent function utility Utility list in GX Developer and take necessary measures 8 13 8 3 Operating the Utility Package 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function module utility UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX 8 4 Initial Setting if Purpose gt Configure initial setting to operate the Q64AD2DA for each channel u ere f For the types of initial setting parameters refer to Section 8 1 Setting parameters in the Initial setting window can omit parameter settings with sequence program z 5 Operating procedure e wW Input Start I O No 1 gt Select Module type gt Select Module model name gt DZ gt TT 7 O Click the Initial setting button 2 1 Input a start I O number in hexadecimal Setting window lt O i
228. re 7 13 Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Table 7 8 Intelligent function module switch setting Reference Setting item Description section Input range setting CH1 to CH4 OH 4 to 20mA i 1H 0 to 20mA Input range setting o Section CH1 to CH4 2H 1 to 5V 31 Switch 1 3H 0 to 5V Set an input range per channel E 4 ction H 4 10 to 10V a CH4 CH3CH2 CH1 5H 0 to 10V 2 AH 4 to 20mA Extended mode BH 1 to 5V Extended mode Output range setting Output range setting CH5 and CH6 CH5 and CH6 OH 4 to 20mA Section Switch 2 es Set an output ra er channel l wi an output range per channel o o H 2H 1 to 5V p Je Section R CH6 CH5 3H 0 to 5V 3 2 2 Fixed to On 4H 10 to 10V Analog output HOLD CLEAR function setting Setting of the analog output HOLD CLEAR i CHS and CH6 function CH5 and CH6 Set the analog output HOLD Section Switch 3 i o o k 0H CLEAR CLEAR function per channel 4 3 2 Z CH6 CHS 1H to FH A numeral other than 0H 1 HOLD Fixed to On Mode setting H Section i x 3 1 Switch 4 T Fixed to 00n Set a mode Setin OH Normal resolution mode 3 2 1H to Fu A value other than 0u High resolution mode Fixed to Ou Switch 5 Fixed to OH 1 Setting any values within the setting range will provide the same operation When the setting range is 1
229. res POINT 1 If logging does not start check the following e Is CH1 Logging enable disable setting Un G30 set to be disabled 1 If CH1 Logging enable disable setting Un G30 has been set to be disabled 1 set CH1 Logging enable disable setting Un G30 to be enabled 0 e Is the initial setting correct If the initial setting has an error Error flag XF is set to on and ERR LED lights up Reconfigure the initial setting referring to the error code refer to Section 11 1 2 If Operating condition setting request Y9 is set to on during logging the logging will stop whether hold triggers are executed or not and all the stored logging data will be cleared before Operating condition setting request Y9 is set to on 4 22 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 7 Logging function FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 4 Reference of logging data If CH1 Logging hold flag X1 is set to on refer to the buffer memory shown in Figure 4 13 and Figure 4 14 The logging datad point determines how to refer to the logging data storage area Example The held logging data point is 10000 CH1 Logging data storage area Un G5000 to Un G14999 Un G5000 The data that a trigger is executed 8999 5000 3999 Un G8999 Valid data CH1 Trigger pointer Un G123 Initial buffer memory address in the logging data storage area CH1 Latest pointer Un G121 the number of valid data points can be ch
230. rogram 1 CH1 to CH3 Reading of a scaling value 2 CH3 Processing when an input signal detects an error c D A conversion program 1 CH5 and CH6 Initial setting of a digital input value 2 CH5 and CH6 Writing of a digital input value 3 CH5 and CH6 Analog output enable d Output of an error code to an output module in BCD 9 1 Programming Procedures Q PROGRAMMING AG el series 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration This section explains program examples using the following system configuration and conditions 1 System configuration QY10 Y20 to Y2F QX10 X10 to X1F Q64AD2DA X Y0 to X YF Figure 9 2 System configuration example 2 Conditions of the intelligent function module switch setting a A D conversion Table 9 1 Conditions of the intelligent function module switch setting Channel Input range setting Resolution setting CH1 4 to 20mA CH2 4 to 20mA Extended mode High resolution mode CH3 1 to 5V CH4 Not used b D A conversion Table 9 2 Conditions of the intelligent function module switch setting Setting of the analog output HOLD CLEAR Output range setting Resolution setting function CH5 4 to 20mA CLEAR High resolution mode CH6 1 to 5V HOLD 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 4 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX INDEX Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA cries 3 Programming condit
231. rom off to on OZ nO 3 Specifying the upper and lower limit value for the input signal error detection 9 The setting for upper and lower limit value of input signal error detection is based on 2 CH1 Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection upper limit S value and Input signal error detection lower limit value The value is set in 9 increments of 1 0 1 o When the upper and lower detection is set CH1 Input signal error detection setting 4 value Un G21 is reflected to both upper and lower limit value of input signal error detection a Input signal error detection upper limit value A value that the addition of a value multiplied an input range width gain value offset value by CH1 Input signal error detection setting value to a gain value The setting is available only when the value is a gain value or more FUNCTION Input signal error detection Gain valu ofeach fande a Input signal error detection _ _Upper limit value 9 x 1000 fa setting value Gain value of each range Offset value of each range Yn e q T 2a b Input signal error detection lower limit value BO A value that the subtraction of a value multiplied an input range width gain value QE offset value by CH1 Input signal error detection setting value from a lower limit value of input range The setting is available only when the value is a lower limit value of input range or amp less ii i Lower limit value
232. s b Text file A text file is created by clicking the Make text file button in the Initial setting lu window Auto refresh setting window and Monitor Test window The file can be utilized to create user documents z Figure 8 4 shows when GX Configurator AD is used The same applies to GX Configurator DA zZ a a Cre fo GX Developer z GX Configurator AD 5 oe nz ais i Zz O lt O i Personal computer D D Programmable zZ controller CPU amp 3 i A Intelligent function module parameters T B Data saved by clicking the Make text file button v 2a ae Yi Z ge z z amp S Figure 8 4 Correlation diagram of data created with the utility package 7 Steps 1 to 3 shown in Figure 8 4 are perfomed as follows i 1 In GX Developer select a Project gt Open project Save Save as 2 In the screen for selecting a target intelligent function module of the utility 9 package select z f Intelligent function module parameter Open parameters Save ES parameters z WZ Poe 3 In GX Developer select oan Online Read from PLC Write to PLC Intelligent function module parameters Or in the screen for selecting a target intelligent function module of the utility package select Online Read from PLC Write to PLC e e x 9 ra q S 5 f g E Q x W ZSF Ed S55 a2s tes S D IJE E Q FEAS 8 3 Operating the Utility Package 8 8 8 3 1 Co
233. s an analog input value Example Scaling value 3 AA Adjust Shifting amount to conversion value to make the scaling value be 0 Set 20mA used as an analog input value Setting Shifting amount to conversion value 3 Example Scaling value 4005 4005 4008 3 Calculate a scaling setting value 1 Fix the A D conversion scaling lower limit value to 0 2 Calculate the A D conversion scaling upper limit value with the scaling operation expression Example 4000 x 4000 4005 3995 0 A D conversion A D conversion Write the A D conversion scaling upper Scaling value x scaling upper scaling lower limit value to the target buffer memory limit value limit value A D conversion The A D conversion scaling lower limit 4000 _ lt _ i i _so7 Scaling lower value is 0 4000 limit value 4 Operation expression for calculating scaling values Set Valid for A D conversion scaling 4008 valid invalid setting For details of the operation expression refer to Section 4 2 3 gt Yy Turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 Is the gain value 4000 Adjust the A D conversion scaling upper limit value YES Record the following values as offset gain correction values Shifting amount to conversion value Add t
234. s cannot be used by the user since they are for system use only If these are set to on or off by the sequence program the performance of the Q64AD2DA cannot be guaranteed 5 1 List of I O Signals 5 I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE MELSEC IA series 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 2 1 I O signals for the Q64AD2DA are explained in detail below Device numbers X Y and buffer memory address shown in this chapter are for CH1 the device number and buffer memory address used only for the D A conversion are CH5 For the device numbers and buffer memory used for other channels refer to Section 5 1 and Section 6 1 Input signals 1 Module ready X0 a When the CPU module is powered on or reset this signal is set to on once the preparation for A D conversion or D A conversion has been completed b When a hardware error error code 1 occurs Module ready X0 is set to off and RUN LED is turned off In such a case A D conversion and D A conversion are not performed 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 2 5 2 1 Input signals OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS S31 FUNCTION ce as 22 96 iy r o BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA D I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE M ELSEG Q series 2 CH1 Logging hold flag X1 For the input signals of CH2 or later refer to Section 5 1 a If the logging is
235. s of D A Conversion 4 27 4 3 3 Analog output test during a CPU module STOP 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 4 3 4 Scaling function D A conversion This function changes an input range of digital input values to a given range between 32000 and 32000 1 Overview a Whether using the scaling function D A conversion for each channel or not can be specified with CH5 D A conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G810 b The scaling function performs scaling conversion of the digital output values set with CH5 Digital input value Un G802 within the range set by the buffer memory e CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit value Un G811 e CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 c The fractional portion of the digital input value converted with scaling function is rounded off CH5 Real conversion digital value Un G902 indicates a digital input value that scaling and shifting are performed Refer to Section 4 3 5 2 Setting methods 1 Set the buffer memory as follows e Setting CH5 D A conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G810 to be enabled 0 e Setting a digital input value corresponding to the upper limit of analog output as the scaling upper limit value set with CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 e Setting a digital input value corresponding to the lower limit of analog output as the scaling lower limit value set with CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit
236. s rounded off G D 4 Settable range 4 If the scaling function D A conversion is used the digital input values of the upper limit and lower limit of the settable range are as follows e Settable upper limit value D A conversion scaling upper limit value A e Settable lower limit value D A conversion scaling lower limit value A FUNCTION A and A depends on a resolution mode output range D A conversion scaling upper limit value and D A conversion scaling lower limit value Refer to Figure 4 16 n a 2a Setting example a8 22 Setting example S F Output range 0 to 5V OT Resolution mode High resolution mode 0 to 12000 e CH5 D A conversion scaling lower limit value Un G811 1000 CH5 D A conversion scaling upper limit value Un G812 6000 Analog output 4 gt value fs O12V Psevtoccuheousers boseeroseedoesstese dates besser sas i Lo lal aaa ap ala lal a all oan eS del isla wW 1 1 i i fe i i w i i ri i i L i i i i m i gt 0 12V Se SS Pee 2 288 0 12000 12286 12287 Real conversion s T eee E eer lar cp i i ji 1 digital value a i gt i iS hA Aaj iti goo T Digital input values Guz 880 1000 6000 6119 6120 resulted from executing Fs 2 E T scaling from 1000 to 6000 X u D A conversion scaling D A conversion scaling aaa lower limit value upper limit value Figure 4 16 Settable range of digital input values 1 This value is a va
237. s shown E 3 For current input always connect the V terminal and I terminal m 4 If noise or a ripple is generated in the external wiring connect a capacitor of 0 1 to 0 474F25V 7 between the V terminal and COM terminal 5 When there is a potential difference between the COM terminal and the GND terminal for external device connect the COM terminal and the GND terminal 6 Always ground the shields of the cables of each channel Also ground the FG terminal of the power supply module 7 One output channel cannot be used for both voltage output and current output 8 Signals may be output from the analog output channels CH5 and CH6 when external power supply for a programmable controller or a module is turned on or off Therefore configure a system that starts controlling after a normal analog signal is output ja Zz lt n Ww a ja Ww 1S O a a a zZ E W N GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 7 4 Wiring 7 8 7 4 2 External wiring PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC TA cries 7 4 3 Wiring of external power supply connector The Q64AD2DA requires a power supply 24VDC 15 to run an analog circuit Install an external power supply connector with referring to 2 in this section and 3 in this section 1 Cables Use cables that meet the applicable wire size shown in Table 7 4 WM l 7mm Table 7 4 Applicable wire size Item Specificati
238. scaling enable disable setting 1 RIw s 811 1011 D A conversion scaling lower limit value 0 RIw s 812 1012 a D A conversion scaling upper limit value 0 Rw 3 813 1013 Shifting amount to input value 0 RIW S 814 1014 to to System area 899 1099 900 1100 Md Set value check code 0 R 901 1101 System area PYN 902 1102 Md Real conversion digital value 0 R conversion 903 1103 a to to System area 911 1111 912 1112 es Setting range 0 R 913 1113 HOLD CLEAR function setting 0 R 914 1114 to to System area 989 1189 990 1190 Latest error code 0 R 991 4191 First two digits Last two digits of 0 R of the year the year 992 1192 Mg Error time Day 0 R 993 ng Minute 0 R 994 1194 Day of the week 0 R 995 1195 to to System area 999 1199 1 Pr indicates the setting data and Md indicates the monitoring data 2 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 3 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write condition of the following I O signals Buffer memory write condition UO i H fof HOY 00 o j Write Operating Operating condition 1 request condition setting completion flag setting request n Figure 6 2 Setting example of interlock condition 6 3 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G el ceries
239. settable numbers Table 8 2 The number of parameters that can be set with GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA Settable number of parameters Initial setting Auto refresh setting Modules mounted with intelligent function modules or a station on which the modules are mounted Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 512 256 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU 512 256 Q02PH Q06PH Q12PH Q25PHCPU 512 256 Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU 512 256 QO00UJ Q00U Q01UCPU 512 256 QO2UCPU 2048 1024 Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Q03UDE 4096 2048 Q04UDEH QO6UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEH Q100UDEHCPU Cannot be used Cannot be used MELSECNET H remote 1 O station 512 256 For example when multiple intelligent function modules are mounted on the MELSECNET H remote I O station set GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA so that the number of parameters set for all the intelligent function modules may not exceed the settable number of parameters for the MELSECNET H remote I O station Count the number of parameters set in the initial setting and the auto refresh setting separately The number of parameters that can be set for one module with GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA are as shown below Table 8 3 The number of parameters that can be set for one module Module Initial setting Auto refresh setting GX Configurator AD Q64AD2DA i GX Configurator DA 8 Fixed 61 Max 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility
240. signal X7 to off set Error clear request YF to on after the analog input value returns to within the setting range ALM LED turns off immediately after CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 is set to off 0 A SPECIFICATIONS d lt When the analog input value returns to within the setting range A D conversion is resumed independently of whether CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 and Input signal error detection signal X7 are reset or not CH1 A D FUNCTION conversion completed flag Un G113 of the corresponding channel is set to on i i e w again after the first updating ALM LED remains blinking 53 a Analog A F input value z z 6 amp Error detection a F Input signal error bs 2 detection upper _ limit value Normal input value CH1 Analog input value gt fa Input signal error g detection lower 7 limit value ae wi mE uw 5 m gt ON Time 2 CH1 Input signal error s detection flag Un G114 pe o Oor ES ene nee quz Input signal error detection signal X7 a 2 X u oon CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 Error clear request YF Figure 4 4 Input signal error detection UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 11 4 2 5 Input signal error detection function 4 FUNCTION CH1 Input signal error MELSEC TA cries e The input signal error detection is e
241. sosesososooeoe G 13 CH1 Input Signal Error Detection Setting Value UN G21 ccrcrercececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccces G 14 CH1 Logging Enable Disable Setting UN G3O eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeessscsssesososesesesoseseseoesesececeoeose G 14 CH1 Logging Cycle Setting Value Un G31 and CH1 Logging Cycle Unit Setting Un G32 sese 6 15 CH1 Logging Data Setting UN G33 seseeeeeeeeeeececeesesesocososoocosscseseseseseseseseseseceoeceesosesese G 16 CH1 Logging Points After Trigger UN G34 eeeeeeeeeseessesesssssesesesecececeseseseseseseseoececeesesosoee G 16 CH1 Level Trigger Condition Setting Un G35 seeeeeeeeeseseeseesesessessoscsosesseesecesesosesesesesesesee G 17 CH1 Trigger Data UN G36 e eeeeeseseseseeesesececececcecocococososoooscsosesesesesesesesesesecececeesesesese G 10 CH1 Trigger Setting Value UN G37 eseseeeeececeesececceceoecscossesesssesosesosesesesesesesecececessesosese G 19 CH1 Digital Output Value UN G100 UnN G1700 eeseseeseseecescecescoseccosececsececceseecescesesceseesoe G 20 CH1 Scaling Value UN G102 Un G1710 eseeeeeeeeseseesececscccocscocossssosscocecesecesocecececeseesssese G 21 CH1 Maximum Digital Output Value Un G104 Un G1720 and CH1 Minimum Digital Output Value Un G106 Un G1 721 eececceccccccccccccococococcecccccccccccccoccococoococccccoccccccecceccococoococeocccececcoo 6 22 CH1 Maximum Scaling Value Un G108 Un G1740 and CH1 Minimum Scaling Value UN G110 UN G1741 seeeeeeeeceesesescccscsosesesese
242. t Figure 4 18 I O characteristic after shifting processing Table 4 16 Digital input value after shifting processing CH5 Digital input value Output current CH5 Digital input value Un G802 mA Un G802 Output current mA For the case of above example set CH5 Shifting amount to input value Un G813 to 20 Before and after the shifting processing the digital input value real conversion digital value and analog output value are as follows Table 4 17 Shifting processing STA CH5 Real conversion PA R CH5 Digital input value ns Output current CH5 Shifting amount to input digital value Un G802 mA value Un G813 Un G902 7000 7000 ae CH5 Real conversion gt s F CH5 Digital input value an Output current CH5 Shifting amount to input digital value Un G802 Cu value Un G813 Un G902 0 1 4 32 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion 4 3 5 Shifting function D A conversion 4 FUNCTION MELSEC TA eries 4 4 Details of Common Function 4 4 1 Analog conversion enable disable setting 1 Analog conversion enable disable setting and conversion speed Set whether A D or D A conversion for the A D conversion channels CH1 to CH4 and D A conversion channels CH5 CH6 is enabled or disabled for each channel The Q64AD2DA conversion speed is calculated with the formula 500 4 s x Number of conversion enabled channels The Q64AD2DA converts according to the two types of the co
243. t function module switch setting with GX Developer Write the intelligent function module parameters to the remote I O station E POINT For details of the MELSECNET H remote I O network refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 9 3 1 Before program creation Q PROGRAMMING M als AG lA cries 9 3 2 Program example using the utility package 1 Device list PROGRAMMING Table 9 11 Device list Device Function w1 Device to which CH1 Scaling value is written by auto refresh W2 Device to which CH2 Scaling value is written by auto refresh ai W3 Device to which CH3 Scaling value is written by auto refresh W4 Device to which CH1 A D conversion completed flag is written by auto refresh z i W5 Device to which CH2 A D conversion completed flag is written by auto refresh A g W6 Device to which CH3 A D conversion completed flag is written by auto refresh W7 Device to which CH3 Input signal error detection flag is written by auto refresh w8 Device to which CH1 Error code is written by auto refresh w9 Device to which CH2 Error code is written by auto refresh 2 WA Device to which CH3 Error code is written by auto refresh g WB Device to which CH4 Error code is written by auto refresh T WC Device to which CH5 Error code is written by auto r
244. t required Input signal error detection l 0 since Disable is set since Disable is set 100 setting value The default value is The default value is displayed displayed Logging enable disable setting Disable Disable Disable Disable Logging cycle unit setting Us Logging cycle setting value 3000 Logging data setting Scaling value Logging points after trigger 5000 Setting is not required Setting is not required Setting is not required Level trigger condition setting Disable since Disable is set since Disable is set since Disable is set CH1 102 The default value is The default value is The default value is CH2 302 displayed displayed displayed Trigger data CH3 502 CH4 702 Trigger setting value 0 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 10 9 2 2 Program example using the utility package ONLINE MODULE CHANGE PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX INDEX Q PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA cries Table 9 6 List of initial setting items D A conversion area Setting item Default CH5 CH6 D A conversion enable disable i Disable Enable Enable setting D A conversion scaling enable i e Disable Disable Enable disable setting D A conversion scaling lower 7 ae 0 oe i 1000 limit value Setting is not required D A li since Disable is set conversion scaling upper ed eee 0 The default value is 5000 lim
245. t to averaging processing can be checked every sampling 4 2 5 processing This function increases input ranges Input range extended mode K Section Combining the input range extended mode function and input signal error function f 4 2 6 detection function detects a disconnection This function performs logging of the digital values that A D conversion is 5 a performed Section Logging facility Logging data can be stored up to 10000th data point and time series data that 4 2 7 A D conversion is performed can be referred and stored easily 4 1 Function List OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM A SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE BUFFER MEMORY PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING GX Configurator AD GX UTILITY PACKAGE Configurator DA 4 FUNCTION Table 4 1 Function list MELSEC TA cries R Reference Item Function section 1 This function sets whether D A conversion values are output or offset D A output enable disable values are output for each channel Section function 2 The conversion speed does not change regardless of whether CH5 4 3 1 Output enable disable flag Y5 is enabled ON or disabled OFF Analog output HOLD CLEAR This function retains an output analog value for the case where the CPU Section function module is placed in STOP or in a stop error status 4 3 2 When CH5 Output enable disable flag Y5 is set to
246. t value check code Q a Flash ROM setine Details O Monitoring g Cannot execute test 5 Make text file O S Ow Se Stop monitor gt X Y monitor test Maximum value minimum O value information Fy X Y monitor test J Maximum value minimum value information Module information Module information Hi Module type A D Conversion Module Start 170 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0000 U Module model name Q64AD2DA Module model name Q64AD2DA a Setting item Current value Setting value Setting item Current value Setting value X00 Module ready ON Ready CH1 Maximum digital output value 1X01 CH1 Logging hold flag OFF No HOLD executed CH1 Minimum digital output value 1X02 CH2 Logging hold flag OFF No HOLD executed CH2 Maximum digital output value G x03 CH3 Logging hold flag OFF No HOLD executed CH2 Minimum digital output value a lt 04 CH4 Logging hold flag OFF No HOLD executed CH3 Maximum digital output value xt X06 Extemal power off flag JON No external power supplied CH3 Minimum digital output value gt no X07 Input signal error detection signal OFF No Input Signal Error CH4 Maximum digital output value a Ww X08 High resolution mode status flag ON High resolution mode CH4 Minimum digital output value aa X09 Operating condition setting completion flag ON No request CH1 Maximum scaling value XOD Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag OFF Release CH1 Minimum scaling value 2 A O XOE A D conversio
247. tatus Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Figure 10 5 Online module change mounting check dialog box 4 Operation check a To check operations click the button and see if the restart of control is canceled Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address OOH RN Module name Q64AD2DA Installation confirmation Status Module control restart S f Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Figure 10 6 Online module change restart of module control dialog box 10 3 Procedures of Online Module Change 1 0 6 10 3 1 When the initial setting has been configured with GX Configurator AD or GX Configurator DA _ Ww a ia a Ww Zz a W oO Zz T O PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX INDEX ONLINE MODULE CHANGE MELSEC TA series b Click the button to suspend the online module change mode MELSOFT series GX Developer 9 Figure 10 7 Dialog box informing the suspension of online module change mode c Click the button to close the System Monitor dialog box System Monitor TUE CE E TOR Gee Figure 10 8 System Monitor dialog box 1 0 7
248. tatus when a CPU module stop error occurs Hold Offset Offset OV OmA x 4 Analog output status when a watchdog timer error OV OMA OV OMA OV OmA OV OMA occurs in the Q64AD2DA Ma DE 1 This occurs when program operations are not completed within the scheduled time due to a S hardware problem of the Q64AD2DA When a watchdog timer error occurs Module ready X0 is 2s set to off and the Q64AD2DA RUN LED is turned off 5 568 4 3 Function Details of D A Conversion 4 25 4 3 1 D A output enable disable function 4 FUNCTION 4 26 MELSEC TA cries 4 POINT The following conditions should be satisfied when the analog output HOLD CLEAR function is used on a MELSECNET H remote I O station e The master module of function version D or later and the remote I O module of function version D or later are required Validate the station unit block guarantee of the send side cyclic data The setting for holding the Q64AD2DA output in the case of a link error must be made in the Error time output mode in the I O assignment setting Refer to Section 7 5 1 2 At this time the HOLD CLEAR setting in Switch 3 of Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box is not reflected This setting is validated on a per module basis and is not made on a per channel basis Therefore to make the output status at a stop error or STOP of the CPU module matched with the output status at a link error set the same HOLD CLEA
249. tected Even if the analog input value falls to or below the input signal error detection lower limit setting value an error is not detected Disconnection detection is executed E POINT Setting CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 for the channel setting the following input ranges detects disconnection Refer to Section 4 2 6 3 4 to 20mA Extended mode 4 12 e 1 to 5V Extended mode Input signal error detection Error detection upper limit value IN 20mA Input range OmA Not detected a Refer to Section 4 2 6 3 If CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 is set to detect disconnection 4 for the channel setting input ranges other than above ranges an error error code 1212 occurs 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 5 Input signal error detection function 4 FUNCTION MELSEC TA eries 2 Setting methods 1 Set the value for CH1 Input signal error detection setting value Un G21 of a corresponding channels in 0 1 increments i 2 Set the value for CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO of corresponding channels to A D conversion enable 0 3 Select the condition of input signal error detection to be used from 1 to 3 in the Z Table 4 2 for CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 of z corresponding channels o ae 4 Validate the setting of Operating condition setting request Y9 f
250. tegral multiple of the updating cycle within the setting range Unless the setting logging cycle meets the updating cycle shown in Table 6 14 an error will occur and the data logging will not be performed Refer to Section 11 1 Table 6 14 Updating cycle of data to be logged CH1 Averaging process method setting Un G1 Sampling processing 0 Number of channels enabling conversion 2 x 500 us Updating cycle of data to be logged Time averaging 1 Averaging process time number of times setting ms Averaging process time number of times setting x Number of channels Count averaging 2 enabling conversion 2x 5004s Move averaging 3 Number of channels enabling conversion x 500 us 1 Updating cycle of data to be logged with the moving average can be calculated with the same formula for the sampling processing so that data are updated at every sampling periods Refer to Section 4 2 1 2 Number of channels enabling A D conversion and D A conversion 3 Refer to the section describing CH1 Averaging process time number of times setting Un G2 Refer to Section 6 4 6 15 6 11 CH1 Logging Cycle Setting Value Un G31 and CH1 Logging Cycle Unit Setting Un G32 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G el ceries 6 12 CH1 Logging Data Setting Un G33 Data to be logged is set during the logging facility use Refer to Section 4 2 7 3 For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section
251. telligent function module switch setting with GX Developer o Z E fe T no W a gt O ra x a Zz W Q ae lt x lt W Q zZ 9 2 Programming for Normal System Configuration 9 8 9 2 1 Before program creation Q PROGRAMMING 9 2 2 Program example using the utility package MELSEC TA eries 1 Device list Table 9 4 Device list Device Function Device to which CH1 Scaling value is written by auto refresh D1 D2 Device to which CH2 Scaling value is written by auto refresh D3 D4 Device to which CH3 Scaling value is written by auto refresh Device to which CH1 A D conversion completed flag is written by auto refresh D5 Device to which CH2 A D conversion completed flag is written by auto refresh D6 Device to which CH3 A D conversion completed flag is written by auto refresh D7 Device to which CH3 Input signal error detection flag is written by auto refresh D11 Device to which CH5 Digital input value is written by auto refresh D12 Device to which CH6 Digital input value is written by auto refresh D13 Device to which CH1 Error code is written by auto refresh D14 Device to which CH2 Error code is written by auto refresh D15 Device to which CH3 Error code is written by auto refresh D16 D17 Device to which CH4 Error code is written by auto refresh Device to which CH5 Error code is written by auto refresh D18 D19 Device
252. tem area fo m 1839 Yi Or 1840 Error code gt 1841 First two digits Last two digits of 6 vi ii of the year the year P R 1842 ely Error time Month Day gt 1843 Hour Minute Q 1844 Second Day of the week 3 1845 m Wwe to System area n 1849 a 1850 Error code 1851 First two digits Last two digits of a wa ii of the year the year R z 1852 Boya eatin Month Day amp 2 1853 Hour Minute Ee 1854 Second Day of the week a 2 E OE 1855 Wor X w to System area oan 1859 x 9 ge Sss Ose 158 fet gt 55 FOD ax 598 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres Table 6 4 Error history Un G1800 to Un G1964 Address decimal History number Description Default Read write 2 1860 Error code 1861 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1862 Md History 6 Enor ime Month Day 0 R 1863 Hour Minute 1864 Second Day of the week 1865 to System area 1869 1870 Error code 1871 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1872 Md History 7 Error tm Month Day 0 R 1873 Hour Minute 1874 Second Day of the week 1875 to System area 1879 1880 Error code 1881 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1882 Md History 8 TATENA Month Day 0 R 1883 Hour Minute 1884 S
253. th is not required when Disable has been set The default value which will be displayed in the Setting value field needs not to be changed Table 9 5 List of initial setting items A D conversion area Setting item Default CH1 CH2 CH3 A D conversion enable disable f Disable Enable Enable Enable setting Averaging process method P 3 iis Sampling processing Sampling processing Count averaging Move averaging i 0 When Time averaging s Move averaging or Averaging process time number a Count averaging is 0 50 10 of times setting selected in Averaging process method setting 4 A D conversion scaling enable i Disable Disable Enable Disable disable setting A D conversion scaling lower 0 4000 limit value Setting is not required Setting is not required f since Disable is set since Disable is set A D conversion scaling upper eS 0 The default value is 5000 The default value is limit value gt i displayed displayed Siia amount cein Setting ie not required Setting is niot required Setting is niot requited elas 0 since this item is not since this item is not since this item is not used The default value used The default value used The default value is displayed is displayed is displayed Input signal error detection Upper and lower a ES Disable Disable Disable P Sa setting detection f Setting is not required Setting is no
254. the Q64AD2DA Table 4 1 Function list q Reference Item Function i section 1 Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion The value is stored in buffer memory 2 Averaging processing B Section A D conversion method The digital output value is averaged on a channel basis and the X21 averaged value is stored in buffer memory a The averaging processing has three methods as follows a Time average b Count average c Moving average a 1 This function retains the maximum and minimum values of the digital k Maximum and minimum values A j Section output values and scaling values in the module hold function A T 4 2 2 2 The retained values can be reset in any timing Scaling function A D This function converts digital output values to scaling values and stores the Section converted values into buffer memory conversion i 4 2 3 Time to configure a program for scaling can be decreased The digital output value can be adjusted easily with the shifting function when Shifting function A D the CPU is powered on Section conversion The shifting function adds a setting quantity to a digital output value and 4 2 4 stores the value into buffer memory This function detects voltage or current input values exceeding the setting Input signal error detection ranges Section function A channel se
255. the initial setting has been configured with sequence program 1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA cries CHAPTER11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 11 1 This chapter describes the errors which may occur during the use of the Q64AD2DA and troubleshooting The device numbers X or Y and buffer memory addresses described in this chapter are used for the channel 1 The device numbers and buffer memory addresses specified in D A conversion are used for CH5 For the device numbers and buffer memory addresses used for the other channels refer to Section 5 1 and Section 6 1 Error Code List If an error occurs when data is written to read from the CPU module the Q 64AD2DA writes the corresponding error code to the buffer memory address 1 Storage area for latest error code and error time Table 11 1 Storage area of buffer memory address for latest error code and error time Error occurrence Reference Latest error code Error time i channel section CH1 Un G190 Un G191 to Un G194 CH2 Un G390 Un G391 to Un G394 CH3 Un G590 Un G591 to Un G594 3 b in this CH4 Un G790 Un G791 to Un G794 section CH5 Un G990 Un G991 to Un G994 CH6 Un G1190 Un G1191 to Un G1194 3 a in this Un G1790 Un G1791 to Un G1794 section 2 Storage area for error history Up to last 16 error logs are stored into the Error history Un G1810 to Un G1964 EJPOINT 1 The data of error time are stored into CH1 Error time Un G19
256. thin the set time is shown below FUNCTION I O SIGNALS FOR THE CPU MODULE Processing times Setting time Times Numbers of channels to be used x 0 5 Example Processing times under the following setting e Number of channels used 4CH A D conversion CH1 CH2 and CH3 D A conversion CH5 e Setting time 15ms BUFFER MEMORY 15 _ 7 5 times The figures after the decimal fractions are omit 4 x 0 5 Seven times conversion processing are performed and the average value is output 7 x 4 x 0 5 14 ms The average value is output every 14 ms PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 3 4 2 1 A D conversion methods 4 FUNCTION MELSEG TA eres 4 POINT Set the setting time that meets the following condition for time averaging processing If the setting time does not meet the following condition an error error code O 202 occurs and the digital output value changes to 0 Setting time Minimum processing times 4 times x 0 5 ms x Number of channels to be used total number of A D conversion and D A conversion Example Number of channels to be used Six channels e Setting time 4 x 6 x 0 5 Set the setting time to 12ms or higher b Count average A D conversion is made the preset number of times and the sum of values excluding the maximum and minimum
257. ting j SE Mi Section 8 4 A D conversion scaling upper limit value eLevel trigger condition setting Shifting amount to conversion value Trigger data Trigger setting value b D A conversion area D A conversion enable disable setting D A conversion scaling lower limit value D A conversion scaling enable disable D A conversion scaling upper limit value setting Shifting amount to input value 2 The initial setting data are registered with parameters of the CPU module and automatically written to the Q64AD2DA when the CPU module enters in the RUN status 1 Buffer memory of the Q64AD2DA to be auto refreshed is set Auto refresh setting 2 Buffer memory of the Q64AD2DA with the auto refresh setting is automatically read and written Section 8 5 to the specified device when the END instruction for the CPU module is executed 1 Monitor Test The buffer memory and I O signals of the Q64AD2DA are monitored and tested 2 Maximum value minimum value information 3 The maximum minimum digital output values and the maximum minimum scaling values are Monitor Test Section 8 6 monitored and reset 3 Operating condition setting Initial setting items are changed during operation and detection status of input signal error is monitored 1 An intelligent function module parameter initial setting auto refresh setting is automatically f FB conversion Section 8 7 converted into an FB 8 1 Utility Package Functions UTILITY PACKAGE
258. ting value Un G21 on any of the channels enabled for A D conversion after the input signal error detection for CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 is made valid any of 1 to 4 b Setting Input signal error detection signal X7 to on causes the following processing 1 The value 0 not used or in first A D conversion will be stored into CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 2 Digital output values of the corresponding channel will be held at the immediately preceding value of error detection 3 ALM LED will blink c To restart A D conversion bring the analog input value within the setting range and set Error clear request YF to on Consequently Input signal error detection signal X7 will be set to off ALM LED will be turned off and A D conversion will be resumed Unless Error clear request YF is set to on A D conversion will be resumed when the analog input value returns to within the setting range However Input signal error detection signal X7 set to on and the blinking ALM LED will not be canceled d After the first updating the value 1 first A D conversion completed will be stored into CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 again The averaging processing will start from the first time after resumption of A D conversion aranna gt Executed with the Q64AD2DA gt Executed with sequence program oe ra an 4 0 DX input signal error detection XC 0 ON l Input signal error
259. tio and stores the converted values into buffer memory 1 Overview a Whether using the scaling function A D conversion for each channel or not can be specified with CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G10 b The scaling function performs scaling conversion of the digital output values set with CH1 Digital output value Un G100 within the range set by the buffer memory e CH1 A D conversion scaling lower limit value Un G11 e CH1 A D conversion scaling upper limit value Un G12 c The fractional portion of the output value converted with scaling function is rounded off and stored into CH1 Scaling value Un G102 d The setting range allowed for the A D conversion scaling upper and lower limit values is 32000 to 32000 4 POINT The setting range allowed for the A D conversion scaling upper and lower limit values is 32000 to 32000 Note that the resolution will not change even if an A D conversion scaling upper lower limit value is set to change more than the resolution 4 6 4 2 Function Details of A D Conversion 4 2 2 Maximum and minimum values hold function 4 FUNCTION MELSEC TA eries 2 Setting methods 1 Set the buffer memory as follows a e Setting CH1 A D conversion scaling enable disable setting Un G10 to be i enabled 0 2 e Setting a value corresponding to the upper limit of digital output as the scaling upper limit value set with CH1 A D conversion sc
260. tion module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94 inches or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Shut off the external power supply for the system in a
261. to on 1 Zz a Setting methods 1 Disconnection detection can be performed only when the input range is set to o ae either D2 4 to 20mA Extended mode ee e 1 to 5V Extended mode 2 To use the disconnection detection function set CH1 Input signal error P detection setting Un G20 to detect disconnections 4 and set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on S m b Operation for disconnection detection D N 1 If the conditions described in Table 4 5 are satisfied the following operations 4 perform Input signal error detection signal X7 is set to on e CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 is set to on 1 e ALM LED blinks To disable the above operations cancel the conditions of disconnection detection shown in Table 4 5 and set Error clear request YF to on Table 4 5 Condition of disconnection detection FUNCTION Input range Condition of disconnection detection 4 to 20mA Extended mode Input analog value 2mA 1 to 5V Extended mode Input analog value 0 5V 2 A digital output value immediately before the disconnection detections is held for CH1 Digital output value Un G100 and CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 is set to off 0 3 When the disconnection is restored A D conversion resumes independently and CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 is set to on 1 after the first updating Ee POINT The disconnection detection is executed at ev
262. tput value gt 1 to 5V 0 4 0 1 Extended mode 16digit 4digit 0 4 0 1 m 0 to 20mA 48digit 12digit S 4 to 20mA g 4 to 20mA Extended mode Conversion speed 500 Us channel Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA 3 1 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A eres Table 3 1 Performance specifications of the Q64AD2DA 2 2 Item Specifications Number of analog output j 2 points 2 channels points u EET Normal resolution mode 96 to 4095 4096 to 4095 ae Digital input u High resolution mode 288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 6 Analog Voltage 10 to 10VDC External load resistance 1Ma output Current 0 to 20mADC External load resistance 6002 E nalo Normal resolution mode High resolution mode z g Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum 2 e output range value resolution value resolution z A 0 to 5V 1 25mV 0 416mV o I O characteristics D i i 7 E 1 to 5V 0 to 4000 1OmV 0 to 12000 0 333mV z i and maximum resouton S 10 to 10V 4000 to 4000 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV O 0 to 20mA 54A 1 66 4A 3 D A 5 4 to 20mA 0t6 4090 4uA 0 to 12000 1 334A conversion area D Z Analog Ambient temperature 2 output range TER S Accuracy Accuracy a 0 to 5V 5 relative to maximum LON 0
263. uments are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SPREAD Copyright C 1997 Farpoint Technologies Inc SH NA 080793ENG B Analog Input Output Module User s Manual MODEL Q64AD2DA U SY E MODEL 13JZ25 SH NA 080793ENG B 1012 MEE afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 os NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
264. upported Q64AD2DA The function version of the Q64AD2DA has been C from the first release supporting the multiple CPU system b Intelligent function module parameters Write intelligent function module parameters only to the control CPU of the Q64AD2DA 3 Support of online module change The function version of the Q64AD2DA has been C from the first release supporting online module change For details refer to CHAPTER 10 2 3 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 4 Supported software packages Operating the Q64AD2DA requires GX Developer whose version is compatible with the CPU system to be used MELSEC Aeres The software packages GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA are not required The intelligent function module parameter setting setting status and operating status can be checked easily by using the packages The software versions compatible with GX Developer GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA and GX Works2 are listed in the Table 2 3 Table 2 3 Compatible software package and software version Software version GX Developer GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA GX Works2 ed OVERVIEW z O z4 E Ww Z Q O SYSTEM Q00J Q00 Single CPU system Version 7 or later i Version 1 10N or later Q01CPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later 2 Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU
265. urator AD GX 8 8 Usage of FB This section explains procedures for using an FB with GX Developer For details refer to the GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Function Block 8 8 1 Overview The following shows procedures for creating an FB 1 Set an intelligent function module parameter initial setting auto refresh setting 2 Convert the intelligent function module parameter into an FB 3 Paste the FB to a sequence program 4 Convert compile the sequence program The following flowchart shows the flow of the above procedures 1 to 4 GX Configurator AD 1 Y or PAER Ki Section 8 4 and GX Configurator DA Set up the initial setting or auto refresh setting Refer to Ra lomo fan ection 8 5 2 Convert the parameter into FB Refer to Section 8 7 3 4 GX Developer Paste the FB to a sequence program Refer to Section 8 8 2 4 4 Convert compile the sequence program Refer to Section 8 8 3 Figure 8 11 FB creation procedure 8 23 8 8 Usage of FB 8 8 1 Overview UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA L M 2 2G Kel series POINT The initial setting auto refresh setting of the intelligent function module can be fa configured by either of the following methods gt 1 Set an intelligent function module parameter initial setting auto refresh setting and write it to the CPU module 2 Create an
266. ut value 0 R a 1728 to System area 1739 A 1740 CH1 Maximum scaling value 0 R z s 1741 CH1 Minimum scaling value 0 R Z 1742 CH2 Maximum scaling value 0 R 2 a 2 TE 1743 VE CH2 Minimum scaling value 0 R fat 8 1744 CH3 Maximum scaling value 0 R a ie 1745 CH3 Minimum scaling value 0 R 1746 CH4 Maximum scaling value 0 R 1747 CH4 Minimum scaling value 0 R 1748 fo 3 EA Loa to System area 29 o 1763 ESR ZSE 52e 588 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 4 BUFFER MEMORY Item Common area MELSEC TA eries Table 6 3 Common area Un G1200 to Un G1799 Data Address decimal ype Description Default Read write 2 1764 WH CH5 Set value check code 0 R 1765 CH6 Set value check code 0 R 1766 to System area 1773 1774 WH CH5 Real conversion digital value 0 R 1775 CH6 Real conversion digital value 0 R 1776 to System area 1789 1790 Latest error code 4791 First two digits Last two digits of of the year the year 1792 Uk Error time Month Day k R 1793 Hour Minute 1794 Second Day of the week 195 to System area 1799 1 Pr indicates the setting data and Md indicates the monitoring data 2 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 3 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write condition of the following I
267. version value limit value 4000 20 4020 5 scaling upper scaling lower limit value limit value 4 Operation expression for calculating scaling values 0 Write the D A conversion scaling upper limit value to the target buffer memory The D A conversion scaling lower limit value is 0 7 Set Valid for D A conversion scaling valid invalid setting gt For details of the operation expression refer to y Turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 ls the analog output value equal to the gain value 20mA Adjust the D A scaling upper limit vave YES v Section 4 2 4 Record the following values as Add the program that writes a shifting amount to input value offset gain correction values Shifting amount to input value D A conversion scaling upper limit value D A conversion scaling lower limit value 0 a D Aconversion scaling upper limit value or a D A conversion scaling lower limit value to buffer memory if necessary Va RET Figure 7 15 Offset gain correction example D A conversion 7 6 Offset Gain Correction PREPARATORY PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC IA series POINT 1 When offset gain are corrected using the scaling function and shift function fa resolution may be reduced In the example of Figure 7 15 the resolution is reduced at 0 5 2 When offset gain are
268. vironment This section explains the operating environment of the personal computer that runs GX Configurator AD and GX Configurator DA Table 8 4 Operating environment Item Description Installation add in location GX Developer Version 4 English version or later Personal computer Windows based personal computer CPU RBGUIEG Refer to Table 8 5 Operating system and performance required for personal computer on the uiri s following page memory Hard disk free For installation 65MB or more space For operation 20MB or more Display Resolution of 800 x 600 pixels or more 4 Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista
269. ws XP Home Edition Service Pack1 or higher Pentium 300MHz or more 128MB or more ao Windows Vista Home Basic Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more Windows Vista Home Premium Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more i Windows Vista Business Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more E Windows Vista Ultimate Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more lt Windows Vista Enterprise Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more 5 a N POINT 1 If any of the following functions is used this product may not operate normally The following functions are not available for Windows XP and Windows Vista e Application start in Windows compatible mode 2 e Fast user switching w e Remote desktop e Large Fonts Advanced setting in the Display Properties dialog box x z Also Windows XP 64 Bit Edition and Windows Vista 64 Bit Edition are not 2 a N 41s supported z 5 2 Operate Windows Vista with user authority or higher Ba SE O W ae Lu We Ww gt a Q Z AR Or ES vao Roe HOE Ww TEH e e x 9 la t S 5 f g E Q x W ZSF Ed S55 a2s tes S D IE E Q FEAE 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package 8 6 8 2 2 Operating environment UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX 8 3 Operating the Utility Package 8 3 1 Common operations 1 Control keys The following table shows control keys that can be used for utility operation and their
270. x 3 192 392 592 792 Mg Error time Month Day 0 R 7 2 193 393 593 793 Hour Minute 0 R 5 2 194 394 594 794 Second Day of the week 0 R S z 195 395 595 795 Qe to to to to System area 6 199 399 599 799 1 Pr indicates the setting data and Md indicates the monitoring data 2 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled R Read enabled W Write enabled 3 When writing data to the buffer memory always use the interlock condition buffer memory write condition of the following I O signals gt x ie WW o W uw wu aa Buffer memory write condition i ae al te ate 1 1 Y9 x9 i vo a ee a eee U0 GO J Z Write Operating Operating condition gt z request condition setting completion flag Cn isetting request LL 2 te A A z q2 Figure 6 1 Setting example of interlock condition h a 2 OE wor u aan x 9 Q lu gio 2864 S52 aae cee E8e ax FO 596 6 2 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres 2 D A conversion area Un G800 to Un G1199 Table 6 2 D A conversion area Un G800 to Un G1199 Description Default Read write 2 800 1000 Pr D A conversion enable disable setting 1 RIw s 801 1001 System area 802 1002 Pr Digital input value 0 RIW 3 803 1003 to to System area 809 1009 810 1010 D A conversion
271. xecuted at every sampling processing f The condition of the input signal error detection can be set with CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 The conditions of the input signal error detection are described in the table below Table 4 2 Condition of input signal error detection and operation Condition of input signal error detection detection setting Un G20 Upper and lower detection 1 Lower detection 2 If the analog input value reaches to or exceeds the input signal error detection upper limit setting value or falls to or below the input signal error detection lower limit setting value an error is detected If the analog input value falls to or below the input signal error detection lower limit setting value an error is detected Even if the analog input value reaches to or exceeds the input signal error detection upper limit setting value an error is not detected Input signal error detection Error detection upper limit value Sal 20mA Input range OmA Input signal error detection lower limit value Not detected NI 20mA Error Y detection Input range OmA Input signal error detection lt lower limit value Error Y detection Upper detection 3 Disconnection detection 4 If the analog input value exceeds the input signal error detection upper limit setting value an error is de
272. ximum digital output value Un G104 e CH1 Minimum digital output value Un G106 e CH1 Maximum scaling value Un G108 Fa e CH1 Minimum scaling value Un G110 b For information on the timing of when Maximum and minimum values reset th request YD is set to on or off refer to the section describing Maximum and 5 minimum values reset completion flag XD Refer to Section 5 2 1 7 a 5 Error clear request YF E MA a To clear a write error and input signal error set Error clear request YF to on AR pein b For information on the timing of when Error clear request YF is set to on or off SE refer to the following ine e Input signal error detection signal X7 Refer to Section 5 2 1 4 e Error flag XF Refer to Section 5 2 1 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator AD GX Configurator DA 5 2 Details of I O Signals 5 10 5 2 2 Output signals 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEG TA eres CHAPTER6 BUFFER MEMORY 6 1 Buffer Memory Assignment This section explains the buffer memory assignments of the Q64AD2DA Device numbers X Y and buffer memory address shown in the Section 6 2 and later sections are for CH1 the device number and buffer memory address used only for the D A conversion are CH5 For the device numbers and buffer memory address used for other channels refer to Section 5 1 and Section 6 1 E POINT In the buffer memory do not write data to the system area or area where data writing dat
273. y Table 6 11 Setting range of CH1 Input signal error detection setting Un G20 Setting T ne F Description Description details value 0 Disable Disables the setting 1 Upper and lower detection Detects both upper and lower limits 2 Lower detection Detects a only lower limit 3 Upper detection Detects a only upper limit Used as a disconnection detection function Refer to 4 Disconnection detection Section 4 2 6 3 1 The setting of detecting disconnections 4 is activated only when the analog input range of the target channel is set as follows 4 to 20mA Extended mode e 1 to 5V Extended mode Setting to detect disconnections 4 for the channels have other settings causes an error error code 0212 b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default The input signal error detection setting is set to be disabled 0 in default configuration 6 13 6 7 CH1 Shifting Amount to Conversion Value Un G13 6 BUFFER MEMORY M als 2G Kel ceries 6 9 CH1 Input Signal Error Detection Setting Value Un G21 if The value detecting an error of input analog values is set Refer to Section 4 2 5 gt For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 u 1 Setting method a Set a value within the setting range by using the buffer memory 5 e Settable range 0 to 250 0 to 25 0 3
274. y e Settable range 32768 to 32767 b Set Operating condition setting request Y9 to on to activate the setting Refer to Section 5 2 2 3 2 Default The value 0 is set for all the channels CH1 to CH4 in default configuration 6 15 CH1 Trigger Data Un G36 6 BUFFER MEMORY MELSEC IA series 6 17 CH1 Digital Output Value Un G100 Un G1700 The A D converted digital output value is set to store gt For information on the buffer memory for CH2 or later refer to Section 6 1 1 and Section u O 6 1 3 1 Stored data z O a Storage form Digital values are stored into the buffer memory in 16 bit signed binary form aio Z b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO ae CH1 Digital output value Un G100 Data part z z S Sign bit mE 1 Negative value Q 0 Positive value es Figure 6 4 Storage data of CH1 Digital output value Un G100 b Updating cycle Refer to Section 4 2 1 e Averaging processing executed Averaging processing cycle set e Averaging processing unexecuted Sampling processing time number z of channels to be used x 5004s S zZ w POINT When reading the digital output values use A D conversion completed flag XE N or CH1 A D conversion completed flag Un G113 as an interlock 53 iL gS Yi QE ez gt ow Q m x uw LL U ao PROCEDURES AND PREPARATORY SETTING UTILITY PACKAGE GX

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  USBモデムドライバ取扱説明書（PDF形式）  brick desktop Manual  Bourse de l`Emploi - Les Industries des Papiers  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file